1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2014-05-20.16} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 28% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 29% 30% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 31% reports; you can get the latest version from: 32% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 33% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 34% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 35% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 36% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 37% 38% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 39% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 40% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 41% 42% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 43% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 44% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 45% tex foo.texi 46% texindex foo.?? 47% tex foo.texi 48% tex foo.texi 49% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 50% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 51% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 52% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 53% 54% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 55% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 56% full Texinfo distribution. 57% 58% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 59 60 61\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 62 63% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 64% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 65% they might have appeared in the input file name. 66\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 67 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 97\let\ptexrbrace=\} 98\let\ptexslash=\/ 99\let\ptexstar=\* 100\let\ptext=\t 101\let\ptextop=\top 102{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 103 104% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 105% starts a new line in the output. 106\newlinechar = `^^J 107 108% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 109% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 110% 111\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 112 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 113\else 114 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 115\fi 116 117% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 118\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 119\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 120\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 121\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 122\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 123\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 124\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 125\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 126\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 127\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 128\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 129\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 130\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 131\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 132\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 133\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 134\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 135\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 136\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 137\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 138% 139\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 151% 152\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 153\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 154\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 155\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 156\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 157 158% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 159\chardef\spacecat = 10 160\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 161 162% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 163\chardef\ampChar = `\& 164\chardef\colonChar = `\: 165\chardef\commaChar = `\, 166\chardef\dashChar = `\- 167\chardef\dotChar = `\. 168\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 169\chardef\hashChar = `\# 170\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 171\chardef\questChar = `\? 172\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 173\chardef\semiChar = `\; 174\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 175\chardef\underChar = `\_ 176 177% Ignore a token. 178% 179\def\gobble#1{} 180 181% The following is used inside several \edef's. 182\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 183 184% Hyphenation fixes. 185\hyphenation{ 186 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 187 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 188 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 189 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 190 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 191 spell-ing spell-ings 192 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 193 wide-spread wrap-around 194} 195 196% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 197\newdimen\bindingoffset 198\newdimen\normaloffset 199\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 200 201% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 202% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 203% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 204% 205\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 206 207% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 208% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 209% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 210% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 211% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 212% 213\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 214\def\loggingall{% 215 \tracingstats2 216 \tracingpages1 217 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 218 \tracingparagraphs1 219 \tracingoutput1 220 \tracingmacros2 221 \tracingrestores1 222 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 223 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 224 \tracingscantokens1 225 \tracingifs1 226 \tracinggroups1 227 \tracingnesting2 228 \tracingassigns1 229 \fi 230 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 231 \errorcontextlines16 232}% 233 234% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 235% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 236% after all. 237% 238\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 239\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 240 241% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 242% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 243% 244\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 245 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 246\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 247 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 248\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 249 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 250 251% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 252% 253\newif\ifcropmarks 254\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 255% 256% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 257% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 258% 259\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 260\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 261\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 262\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 263 264% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 265% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 266% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 267% 268% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 269% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 270% 271% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 272% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 273% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 274% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 275% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 276% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 277\def\domark{% 278 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 279 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 280 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 281 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 282 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 283 \mark{% 284 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: top marks (\last...) 285 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: bottom marks (default, \prev...) 286 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 287 }% 288} 289% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 290% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 291% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 292% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 293% first @chapter. 294\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 295 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 296 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 297} 298\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 299\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 300 301% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 302\def\lastchapterdefs{} 303\def\lastsectiondefs{} 304\def\prevchapterdefs{} 305\def\prevsectiondefs{} 306\def\lastcolordefs{} 307 308% Main output routine. 309\chardef\PAGE = 255 310\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 311 312\newbox\headlinebox 313\newbox\footlinebox 314 315% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 316% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 317\def\onepageout#1{% 318 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 319 % 320 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 321 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 322 % 323 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 324 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 325 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars} 326 % 327 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 328 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 329 % 330 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 331 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 332 % 333 {% 334 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 335 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 336 % before the \shipout runs. 337 % 338 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 339 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 340 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 341 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 342 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 343 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 344 % it needs to be 345 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 346 \shipout\vbox{% 347 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 348 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 349 % 350 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 351 \hsize = \outerhsize 352 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 353 \vtop to0pt{% 354 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 355 \nointerlineskip 356 \line{% 357 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 358 \hfill 359 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 360 }% 361 \vss}% 362 \vskip\topandbottommargin 363 \line\bgroup 364 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 365 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 366 \vbox\bgroup 367 \fi 368 % 369 \unvbox\headlinebox 370 \pagebody{#1}% 371 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 372 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 373 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 374 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 375 \vskip 24pt 376 \unvbox\footlinebox 377 \fi 378 % 379 \ifcropmarks 380 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 381 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 382 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 383 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 384 \vbox to0pt{\vss 385 \line{% 386 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 387 \hfill 388 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 389 }% 390 \nointerlineskip 391 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 392 }% 393 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 394 \fi 395 }% end of \shipout\vbox 396 }% end of group with \indexdummies 397 \advancepageno 398 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 399} 400 401\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 402 403\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 404{\catcode`\@ =11 405\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 406% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 407\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 408 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 409\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 410\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 411\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 412} 413 414% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 415% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 416% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 417% 418\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 419\def\nstop{\vbox 420 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 421\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 422\def\nsbot{\vbox 423 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 424 425% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 426% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 427% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 428% 429\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 430\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 431 \def\argtorun{#2}% 432 \begingroup 433 \obeylines 434 \spaceisspace 435 #1% 436 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 437} 438 439{\obeylines % 440 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 441 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 442 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 443 }% 444} 445 446% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 447\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 448\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 449 450% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 451% 452% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 453% @end itemize @c foo 454% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 455% by \finishparsearg. 456% 457\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 458\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 459\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 460 \def\temp{#3}% 461 \ifx\temp\empty 462 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 463 \let\temp\finishparsearg 464 \else 465 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 466 \fi 467 % Put the space token in: 468 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 469} 470 471% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 472% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 473% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 474% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 475% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 476% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 477% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 478% 479% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 480% 481\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 482 483% \parseargdef\foo{...} 484% is roughly equivalent to 485% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 486% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 487% 488% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 489% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 490 491\def\parseargdef#1{% 492 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 493} 494\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 495 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 496 \def#1##1% 497} 498 499% Several utility definitions with active space: 500{ 501 \obeyspaces 502 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 503 504 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 505 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 506 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 507 % should produce a line of output anyway. 508 % 509 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 510 511 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 512 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 513 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 514 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 515} 516 517 518\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 519 520% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 521% 522% \envdef\foo{...} 523% \def\Efoo{...} 524% 525% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 526% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 527% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 528% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 529% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 530% 531% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 532% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 533% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 534% special case.) 535 536 537% At run-time, environments start with this: 538\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 539% initialize 540\let\thisenv\empty 541 542% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 543\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 544\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 545 546% Check whether we're in the right environment: 547\def\checkenv#1{% 548 \def\temp{#1}% 549 \ifx\thisenv\temp 550 \else 551 \badenverr 552 \fi 553} 554 555% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 556\def\badenverr{% 557 \errhelp = \EMsimple 558 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 559 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 560} 561\def\inenvironment#1{% 562 \ifx#1\empty 563 outside of any environment% 564 \else 565 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 566 \fi 567} 568 569% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 570% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 571% 572\parseargdef\end{% 573 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 574 \else 575 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 576 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 577 \csname E#1\endcsname 578 \endgroup 579 \fi 580} 581 582\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 583 584 585% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 586% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 587% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 588% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 589% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 590{\catcode`@ = 11 591 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 592 % if the definition is written into an index file. 593 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 594 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 595} 596 597% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 598\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 599 600% @* forces a line break. 601\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 602 603% @/ allows a line break. 604\let\/=\allowbreak 605 606% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 607\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 608 609% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 610\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 611 612% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 613\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 614 615% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 616% 617\def\onword{on} 618\def\offword{off} 619% 620\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 621 \def\temp{#1}% 622 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 623 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 624 \else 625 \errhelp = \EMsimple 626 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 627 \fi\fi 628} 629 630% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 631% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 632% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 633\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 634 635% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 636% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 637% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 638% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 639% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 640% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 641% the text is small, which looks bad. 642% 643% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 644% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 645% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 646% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 647% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 648% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 649% 650\newbox\groupbox 651\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 652% 653\envdef\group{% 654 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 655 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 656 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 657 \fi 658 \startsavinginserts 659 % 660 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 661 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 662 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 663 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 664 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 665 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 666 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 667 \comment 668} 669% 670% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 671% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 672% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 673% above. But it's pretty close. 674\def\Egroup{% 675 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 676 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 677 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 678 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 679 \egroup % End the \vtop. 680 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 681 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 682 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 683 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 684 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 685 % group, force a page break. 686 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 687 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 688 \page 689 \fi 690 \fi 691 \box\groupbox 692 \prevdepth = \dimen1 693 \checkinserts 694} 695% 696% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 697% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 698% 699\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 700group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 701where each line of input produces a line of output.} 702 703% @need space-in-mils 704% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 705 706\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 707 708\parseargdef\need{% 709 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 710 % paragraph. 711 \par 712 % 713 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 714 \dimen0 = #1\mil 715 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 716 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 717 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 718 % 719 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 720 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 721 % And a page break here is fine. 722 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 723 % 724 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 725 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 726 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 727 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 728 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 729 % 730 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 731 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 732 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 733 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 734 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 735 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 736 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 737 \penalty9999 738 % 739 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 740 \kern -#1\mil 741 % 742 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 743 \nobreak 744 \fi 745} 746 747% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 748 749\let\br = \par 750 751% @page forces the start of a new page. 752% 753\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 754 755% @exdent text.... 756% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 757 758% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 759% That's how much \exdent should take out. 760\newskip\exdentamount 761 762% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 763\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 764 765% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 766\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 767 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 768 769% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 770% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 771% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 772% 773\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 774\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 775% 776\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 777 \nobreak 778 \kern-\strutdepth 779 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 780 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 781 \vss 782 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 783 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 784 \ifx#1l% 785 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 786 \else 787 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 788 \fi 789 \null 790 }% 791}} 792\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 793\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 794% 795% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 796% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 797% else use TEXT for both). 798% 799\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 800\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 801 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 802 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 803 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 804 \def\righttext{#2}% 805 \else 806 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 807 \def\righttext{#1}% 808 \fi 809 % 810 \ifodd\pageno 811 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 812 \else 813 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 814 \fi 815 \temp 816} 817 818% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 819% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 820% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 821% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 822% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command 823% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work. 824% 825\def\|{% 826 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 827 \leavevmode 828 % 829 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 830 \vadjust{% 831 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 832 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 833 \vskip-\baselineskip 834 % 835 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 836 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 837 \llap{% 838 % 839 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 840 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 841 % 842 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 843 \hskip 12pt 844 }% 845 }% 846} 847 848% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 849% 850\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 851\def\includezzz#1{% 852 \pushthisfilestack 853 \def\thisfile{#1}% 854 {% 855 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 856 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 857 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 858 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 859 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 860 % 861 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 862 % definitions, etc. 863 \expandafter 864 }\temp 865 \popthisfilestack 866} 867\def\filenamecatcodes{% 868 \catcode`\\=\other 869 \catcode`~=\other 870 \catcode`^=\other 871 \catcode`_=\other 872 \catcode`|=\other 873 \catcode`<=\other 874 \catcode`>=\other 875 \catcode`+=\other 876 \catcode`-=\other 877 \catcode`\`=\other 878 \catcode`\'=\other 879} 880 881\def\pushthisfilestack{% 882 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 883} 884\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 885 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 886} 887\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 888 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 889} 890 891\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 892\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 893 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 894% 895\def\thisfile{} 896 897% @center line 898% outputs that line, centered. 899% 900\parseargdef\center{% 901 \ifhmode 902 \let\centersub\centerH 903 \else 904 \let\centersub\centerV 905 \fi 906 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 907 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 908} 909\def\centerH#1{{% 910 \hfil\break 911 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 912 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 913 \line{#1}% 914 \break 915}} 916% 917\newcount\centerpenalty 918\def\centerV#1{% 919 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 920 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 921 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 922 % prevent a page break here. 923 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 924 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 925 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 926 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 927} 928 929% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 930% 931\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 932 933% @comment ...line which is ignored... 934% @c is the same as @comment 935% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 936% 937\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 938\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 939\commentxxx} 940{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 941% 942\let\c=\comment 943 944% @paragraphindent NCHARS 945% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 946% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 947% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 948% 949\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 950\def\noneword{none} 951% 952\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 953 \def\temp{#1}% 954 \ifx\temp\asisword 955 \else 956 \ifx\temp\noneword 957 \defaultparindent = 0pt 958 \else 959 \defaultparindent = #1em 960 \fi 961 \fi 962 \parindent = \defaultparindent 963} 964 965% @exampleindent NCHARS 966% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 967% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 968% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 969\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 970 \def\temp{#1}% 971 \ifx\temp\asisword 972 \else 973 \ifx\temp\noneword 974 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 975 \else 976 \lispnarrowing = #1em 977 \fi 978 \fi 979} 980 981% @firstparagraphindent WORD 982% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 983% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 984% paragraphs. 985% 986% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 987% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 988% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 989% By default, we suppress indentation. 990% 991\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 992\def\insertword{insert} 993% 994\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 995 \def\temp{#1}% 996 \ifx\temp\noneword 997 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 998 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 999 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1000 \else 1001 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1002 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1003 \fi\fi 1004} 1005 1006% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1007% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1008% 1009% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1010% paragraph. 1011% 1012\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1013 \gdef\indent{% 1014 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1015 \indent 1016 }% 1017 \gdef\noindent{% 1018 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1019 \noindent 1020 }% 1021 \global\everypar = {% 1022 \kern -\parindent 1023 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1024 }% 1025} 1026 1027\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1028 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1029 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1030 \global \everypar = {}% 1031} 1032 1033 1034% @refill is a no-op. 1035\let\refill=\relax 1036 1037% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1038% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1039% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1040% 1041\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1042\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1043 1044% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1045% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1046% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1047\def\setfilename{% 1048 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1049 \iflinks 1050 \tryauxfile 1051 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1052 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1053 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1054 \openindices 1055 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1056 % 1057 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1058 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1059 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1060 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1061 \closein 1 1062 % 1063 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1064} 1065 1066% Called from \setfilename. 1067% 1068\def\openindices{% 1069 \newindex{cp}% 1070 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1071 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1072 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1073 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1074 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1075} 1076 1077% @bye. 1078\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1079 1080 1081\message{pdf,} 1082% adobe `portable' document format 1083\newcount\tempnum 1084\newcount\lnkcount 1085\newtoks\filename 1086\newcount\filenamelength 1087\newcount\pgn 1088\newtoks\toksA 1089\newtoks\toksB 1090\newtoks\toksC 1091\newtoks\toksD 1092\newbox\boxA 1093\newcount\countA 1094\newif\ifpdf 1095\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1096 1097% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1098% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1099\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1100\else 1101 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1102 \else 1103 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1104 \else 1105 \pdftrue 1106 \fi 1107 \fi 1108\fi 1109 1110% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1111% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1112% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1113% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1114% 1115% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1116% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1117% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1118% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1119% do this reliably, so we use it. 1120 1121% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1122% which we \xdef. 1123\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1124 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1125 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1126 % Many times it won't matter. 1127 \else 1128 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1129 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1130 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1131 \fi 1132} 1133 1134\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1135with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1136be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1137output) for that.)} 1138 1139\ifpdf 1140 % 1141 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1142 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1143 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1144 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1145 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1146 % black by default, though. 1147 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1148 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1149 % 1150 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1151 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1152 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1153 % 1154 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1155 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1156 \def\setcolor#1{% 1157 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1158 \domark 1159 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1160 } 1161 % 1162 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1163 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1164 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1165 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1166 % 1167 \def\makefootline{% 1168 \baselineskip24pt 1169 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1170 } 1171 % 1172 \def\makeheadline{% 1173 \vbox to 0pt{% 1174 \vskip-22.5pt 1175 \line{% 1176 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1177 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1178 \getcolormarks 1179 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1180 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1181 }% 1182 \vss 1183 }% 1184 \nointerlineskip 1185 } 1186 % 1187 % 1188 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1189 % 1190 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1191 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1192 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1193 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1194 % 1195 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1196 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1197 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1198 % bitmap. 1199 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1200 \begingroup 1201 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1202 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1203 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1204 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1205 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1206 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1207 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1208 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1209 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1210 \fi 1211 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1212 \fi 1213 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1214 \fi 1215 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1216 \fi 1217 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1218 \fi 1219 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1220 \fi 1221 \closein 1 1222 \endgroup 1223 % 1224 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1225 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1226 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1227 \immediate\pdfimage 1228 \else 1229 \immediate\pdfximage 1230 \fi 1231 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1232 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1233 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1234 #1.\pdfimgext 1235 \else 1236 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1237 \fi 1238 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1239 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1240 \fi} 1241 % 1242 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1243 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1244 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1245 \indexnofonts 1246 \turnoffactive 1247 \makevalueexpandable 1248 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1249 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1250 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1251 }} 1252 % 1253 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1254 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1255 % 1256 % by default, use black for everything. 1257 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1258 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1259 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1260 % 1261 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1262 % come from Petr Olsak 1263 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1264 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1265 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1266 \advance\tempnum by 1 1267 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1268 % 1269 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1270 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1271 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1272 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1273 % #4 is the page number 1274 % 1275 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1276 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1277 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1278 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1279 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1280 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1281 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1282 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1283 \else 1284 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest 1285 \fi 1286 % 1287 % Also escape PDF chars in the display string. 1288 \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1289 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1290 % 1291 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1292 } 1293 % 1294 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1295 \begingroup 1296 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1297 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1298 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1299 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1300 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1301 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1302 }% 1303 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1304 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1305 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1306 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1307 }% 1308 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1309 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1310 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1311 }% 1312 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1313 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1314 }% 1315 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1316 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1317 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1318 % 1319 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1320 % al. a second time, below. 1321 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1322 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1323 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1324 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1325 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1326 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1327 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1328 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1329 \readdatafile{toc}% 1330 % 1331 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1332 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1333 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1334 % 1335 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1336 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1337 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1338 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1339 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1340 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1341 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1342 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1343 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1344 % 1345 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1346 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1347 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1348 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1349 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1350 % 1351 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1352 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1353 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1354 % we use for the index sort strings. 1355 % 1356 \indexnofonts 1357 \setupdatafile 1358 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1359 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1360 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1361 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1362 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1363 \input \tocreadfilename 1364 \endgroup 1365 } 1366 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1367 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1368 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1369 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1370 ] 1371 % 1372 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1373 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1374 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1375 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1376 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1377 \fi 1378 \nextsp} 1379 \def\getfilename#1{% 1380 \filenamelength=0 1381 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1382 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1383 \edef\temp{#1}% 1384 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1385 } 1386 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1387 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1388 \else 1389 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1390 \fi 1391 % make a live url in pdf output. 1392 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1393 \begingroup 1394 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1395 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1396 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1397 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1398 % 1399 \normalturnoffactive 1400 \def\@{@}% 1401 \let\/=\empty 1402 \makevalueexpandable 1403 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1404 % special-casing \var here? 1405 \def\var##1{##1}% 1406 % 1407 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1408 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1409 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1410 \endgroup} 1411 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1412 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1413 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1414 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1415 \def\maketoks{% 1416 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1417 \ifx\first0\adn0 1418 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1419 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1420 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1421 \else 1422 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1423 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1424 \let\next=\maketoks 1425 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1426 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1427 \fi 1428 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1429 \next} 1430 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1431 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1432 \def\pdflink#1{% 1433 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1434 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1435 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1436\else 1437 % non-pdf mode 1438 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1439 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1440 \let\endlink = \relax 1441 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1442 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1443 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1444\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1445 1446 1447\message{fonts,} 1448 1449% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1450% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1451% italics, not bold italics. 1452% 1453\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1454 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1455 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1456} 1457 1458% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1459% 1460\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1461 1462\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1463\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1464\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1465\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1466\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1467 1468% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since 1469% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. 1470\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} 1471 1472% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1473% So we set up a \sf. 1474\newfam\sffam 1475\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1476\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1477 1478% We don't need math for this font style. 1479\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1480 1481 1482% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1483% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1484% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1485% 1486\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1487\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1488\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1489% 1490% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1491\def\baselinefactor{1} 1492% 1493\newdimen\textleading 1494\def\setleading#1{% 1495 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1496 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1497 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1498 \normalbaselines 1499 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1500 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1501 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1502 }% 1503} 1504 1505% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1506% 1507% do nothing with this by default. 1508\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1509\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1510\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1511 1512% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1513% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1514% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1515\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1516 \begingroup 1517 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1518 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1519%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1520%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1521%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1522%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1523%%Version: 1.000 1524%%EndComments 1525/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 152612 dict begin 1527begincmap 1528/CIDSystemInfo 1529<< /Registry (TeX) 1530/Ordering (OT1) 1531/Supplement 0 1532>> def 1533/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1534/CMapType 2 def 15351 begincodespacerange 1536<00> <7F> 1537endcodespacerange 15388 beginbfrange 1539<00> <01> <0393> 1540<09> <0A> <03A8> 1541<23> <26> <0023> 1542<28> <3B> <0028> 1543<3F> <5B> <003F> 1544<5D> <5E> <005D> 1545<61> <7A> <0061> 1546<7B> <7C> <2013> 1547endbfrange 154840 beginbfchar 1549<02> <0398> 1550<03> <039B> 1551<04> <039E> 1552<05> <03A0> 1553<06> <03A3> 1554<07> <03D2> 1555<08> <03A6> 1556<0B> <00660066> 1557<0C> <00660069> 1558<0D> <0066006C> 1559<0E> <006600660069> 1560<0F> <00660066006C> 1561<10> <0131> 1562<11> <0237> 1563<12> <0060> 1564<13> <00B4> 1565<14> <02C7> 1566<15> <02D8> 1567<16> <00AF> 1568<17> <02DA> 1569<18> <00B8> 1570<19> <00DF> 1571<1A> <00E6> 1572<1B> <0153> 1573<1C> <00F8> 1574<1D> <00C6> 1575<1E> <0152> 1576<1F> <00D8> 1577<21> <0021> 1578<22> <201D> 1579<27> <2019> 1580<3C> <00A1> 1581<3D> <003D> 1582<3E> <00BF> 1583<5C> <201C> 1584<5F> <02D9> 1585<60> <2018> 1586<7D> <02DD> 1587<7E> <007E> 1588<7F> <00A8> 1589endbfchar 1590endcmap 1591CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1592end 1593end 1594%%EndResource 1595%%EOF 1596 }\endgroup 1597 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1598 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1599 }% 1600% 1601% \cmapOT1IT 1602 \begingroup 1603 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1604 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1605%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1606%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1607%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1608%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1609%%Version: 1.000 1610%%EndComments 1611/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 161212 dict begin 1613begincmap 1614/CIDSystemInfo 1615<< /Registry (TeX) 1616/Ordering (OT1IT) 1617/Supplement 0 1618>> def 1619/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1620/CMapType 2 def 16211 begincodespacerange 1622<00> <7F> 1623endcodespacerange 16248 beginbfrange 1625<00> <01> <0393> 1626<09> <0A> <03A8> 1627<25> <26> <0025> 1628<28> <3B> <0028> 1629<3F> <5B> <003F> 1630<5D> <5E> <005D> 1631<61> <7A> <0061> 1632<7B> <7C> <2013> 1633endbfrange 163442 beginbfchar 1635<02> <0398> 1636<03> <039B> 1637<04> <039E> 1638<05> <03A0> 1639<06> <03A3> 1640<07> <03D2> 1641<08> <03A6> 1642<0B> <00660066> 1643<0C> <00660069> 1644<0D> <0066006C> 1645<0E> <006600660069> 1646<0F> <00660066006C> 1647<10> <0131> 1648<11> <0237> 1649<12> <0060> 1650<13> <00B4> 1651<14> <02C7> 1652<15> <02D8> 1653<16> <00AF> 1654<17> <02DA> 1655<18> <00B8> 1656<19> <00DF> 1657<1A> <00E6> 1658<1B> <0153> 1659<1C> <00F8> 1660<1D> <00C6> 1661<1E> <0152> 1662<1F> <00D8> 1663<21> <0021> 1664<22> <201D> 1665<23> <0023> 1666<24> <00A3> 1667<27> <2019> 1668<3C> <00A1> 1669<3D> <003D> 1670<3E> <00BF> 1671<5C> <201C> 1672<5F> <02D9> 1673<60> <2018> 1674<7D> <02DD> 1675<7E> <007E> 1676<7F> <00A8> 1677endbfchar 1678endcmap 1679CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1680end 1681end 1682%%EndResource 1683%%EOF 1684 }\endgroup 1685 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1686 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1687 }% 1688% 1689% \cmapOT1TT 1690 \begingroup 1691 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1692 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1693%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1694%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1695%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1696%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1697%%Version: 1.000 1698%%EndComments 1699/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 170012 dict begin 1701begincmap 1702/CIDSystemInfo 1703<< /Registry (TeX) 1704/Ordering (OT1TT) 1705/Supplement 0 1706>> def 1707/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1708/CMapType 2 def 17091 begincodespacerange 1710<00> <7F> 1711endcodespacerange 17125 beginbfrange 1713<00> <01> <0393> 1714<09> <0A> <03A8> 1715<21> <26> <0021> 1716<28> <5F> <0028> 1717<61> <7E> <0061> 1718endbfrange 171932 beginbfchar 1720<02> <0398> 1721<03> <039B> 1722<04> <039E> 1723<05> <03A0> 1724<06> <03A3> 1725<07> <03D2> 1726<08> <03A6> 1727<0B> <2191> 1728<0C> <2193> 1729<0D> <0027> 1730<0E> <00A1> 1731<0F> <00BF> 1732<10> <0131> 1733<11> <0237> 1734<12> <0060> 1735<13> <00B4> 1736<14> <02C7> 1737<15> <02D8> 1738<16> <00AF> 1739<17> <02DA> 1740<18> <00B8> 1741<19> <00DF> 1742<1A> <00E6> 1743<1B> <0153> 1744<1C> <00F8> 1745<1D> <00C6> 1746<1E> <0152> 1747<1F> <00D8> 1748<20> <2423> 1749<27> <2019> 1750<60> <2018> 1751<7F> <00A8> 1752endbfchar 1753endcmap 1754CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1755end 1756end 1757%%EndResource 1758%%EOF 1759 }\endgroup 1760 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1761 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1762 }% 1763\fi\fi 1764 1765 1766% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 1767% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1768% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 1769% Example: 1770% #1 = \textrm 1771% #2 = \rmshape 1772% #3 = 10 1773% #4 = \mainmagstep 1774% #5 = OT1 1775% 1776\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1777 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1778 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1779} 1780% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1781\let\cmap\gobble 1782% 1783% (end of cmaps) 1784 1785% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1786% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1787% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1788\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 1789\def\fontprefix{cm} 1790\fi 1791% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1792\def\rmshape{r} 1793\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 1794\def\bfshape{b} 1795\def\bxshape{bx} 1796\def\ttshape{tt} 1797\def\ttbshape{tt} 1798\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1799\def\itshape{ti} 1800\def\itbshape{bxti} 1801\def\slshape{sl} 1802\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1803\def\sfshape{ss} 1804\def\sfbshape{ss} 1805\def\scshape{csc} 1806\def\scbshape{csc} 1807 1808% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 1809% 1810\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1811% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1812\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1813\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1814\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1815\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1816\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1817\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1818\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1819\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1820\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1821\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1822\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1823\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1824\def\textecsize{1095} 1825 1826% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1827\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1828\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1829\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1830\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1831 1832% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1833\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1834\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1835\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1836\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1837\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1838\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1839\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1840\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1841\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1842\font\smalli=cmmi9 1843\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1844\def\smallecsize{0900} 1845 1846% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1847\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1848\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1849\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1850\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1851\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1852\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1853\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1854\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1855\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1856\font\smalleri=cmmi8 1857\font\smallersy=cmsy8 1858\def\smallerecsize{0800} 1859 1860% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1861\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1862\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1863\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1864\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1865\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1866\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1867\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1868\let\titlebf=\titlerm 1869\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1870\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1871\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1872\def\titleecsize{2074} 1873 1874% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 1875\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 1876\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1877\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 1878\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1879\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1880\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1881\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 1882\let\chapbf=\chaprm 1883\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1884\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 1885\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 1886\def\chapecsize{1728} 1887 1888% Section fonts (14.4pt). 1889\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 1890\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1891\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 1892\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1893\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1894\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1895\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1896\let\secbf\secrm 1897\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1898\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 1899\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 1900\def\sececsize{1440} 1901 1902% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 1903\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 1904\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1905\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 1906\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1907\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1908\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 1909\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1910\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 1911\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1912\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 1913\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 1914\def\ssececsize{1200} 1915 1916% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 1917\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 1918\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1919\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1920\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1921\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 1922\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1923\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1924\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1925\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1926\font\reducedi=cmmi10 1927\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 1928\def\reducedecsize{1000} 1929 1930\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 1931\textfonts % reset the current fonts 1932\rm 1933} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 1934 1935 1936% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 1937% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 1938% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 1939% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 1940% 1941\def\definetextfontsizex{% 1942% Text fonts (10pt). 1943\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 1944\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 1945\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1946\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1947\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1948\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1949\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1950\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1951\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1952\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1953\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1954\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1955\def\textecsize{1000} 1956 1957% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1958\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1959\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1960\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1961\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1962 1963% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1964\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1965\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1966\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1967\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1968\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1969\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1970\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1971\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1972\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1973\font\smalli=cmmi9 1974\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1975\def\smallecsize{0900} 1976 1977% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1978\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1979\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1980\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1981\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1982\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1983\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1984\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1985\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1986\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1987\font\smalleri=cmmi8 1988\font\smallersy=cmsy8 1989\def\smallerecsize{0800} 1990 1991% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1992\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1993\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1994\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1995\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1996\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1997\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1998\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1999\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2000\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2001\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2002\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2003\def\titleecsize{2074} 2004 2005% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2006\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2007\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2008\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2009\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2010\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2011\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2012\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2013\let\chapbf\chaprm 2014\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2015\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2016\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2017\def\chapecsize{1440} 2018 2019% Section fonts (12pt). 2020\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2021\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2022\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2023\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2024\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2025\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2026\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2027\let\secbf\secrm 2028\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2029\font\seci=cmmi12 2030\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2031\def\sececsize{1200} 2032 2033% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2034\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2035\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2036\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2037\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2038\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2039\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2040\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2041\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2042\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2043\font\sseci=cmmi10 2044\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2045\def\ssececsize{1000} 2046 2047% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2048\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2049\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2050\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2051\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2052\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2053\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2054\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2055\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2056\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2057\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2058\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2059\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2060 2061\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2062\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2063\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2064\rm 2065} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2066 2067 2068% We provide the user-level command 2069% @fonttextsize 10 2070% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2071% 2072\def\xiword{11} 2073\def\xword{10} 2074\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2075% 2076\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2077 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2078 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2079 % 2080 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2081 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2082 % 2083 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2084 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2085 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2086 \else 2087 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2088 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2089 \fi\fi 2090 \endgroup 2091} 2092 2093 2094% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2095% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2096% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2097% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2098% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2099% 2100\def\resetmathfonts{% 2101 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2102 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2103 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2104} 2105 2106% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2107% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2108% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2109% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2110% 2111% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2112% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2113% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2114% 2115% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2116% 2117\def\textfonts{% 2118 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2119 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2120 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2121 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2122 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2123 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2124 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2125\def\titlefonts{% 2126 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2127 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2128 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2129 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2130 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2131 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2132 \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}} 2133\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} 2134\def\chapfonts{% 2135 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2136 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2137 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2138 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2139 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2140 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2141 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2142\def\secfonts{% 2143 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2144 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2145 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2146 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2147 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2148 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2149 \resetmathfonts \setleading{17pt}} 2150\def\subsecfonts{% 2151 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2152 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2153 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2154 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2155 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2156 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2157 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2158\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2159\def\reducedfonts{% 2160 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2161 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2162 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2163 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2164 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2165 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2166 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2167\def\smallfonts{% 2168 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2169 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2170 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2171 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2172 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2173 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2174 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2175\def\smallerfonts{% 2176 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2177 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2178 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2179 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2180 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2181 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2182 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2183 2184% Fonts for short table of contents. 2185\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2186\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2187\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2188\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2189 2190% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2191\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2192\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2193 2194% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2195\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2196 2197% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2198% can fit this many characters: 2199% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2200% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2201% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2202% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2203% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2204% 2205% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2206% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2207% --karl, 24jan03. 2208 2209% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2210% 2211\definetextfontsizexi 2212 2213 2214\message{markup,} 2215 2216% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2217% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2218% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2219% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2220% 2221\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2222 2223% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2224% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2225% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2226% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2227% currently in effect. 2228\newif\ifmarkupvar 2229\newif\ifmarkupsamp 2230\newif\ifmarkupkey 2231%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2232%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2233\newif\ifmarkupcode 2234\newif\ifmarkupkbd 2235%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2236%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2237\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2238\newif\ifmarkupexample 2239\newif\ifmarkupverb 2240\newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2241 2242\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2243 2244\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2245 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2246 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2247 \markupstylesetup 2248} 2249 2250\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2251 2252\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2253 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2254 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2255 \def#1% 2256} 2257 2258% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2259\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2260 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2261 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2262 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2263} 2264 2265\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2266 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2267 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2268 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2269} 2270 2271{ 2272\catcode`\'=\active 2273\catcode`\`=\active 2274 2275\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2276\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2277 2278\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2279\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2280} 2281 2282\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2283\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2284% 2285\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2286\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2287% 2288\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2289\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2290% 2291\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2292\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2293% 2294\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2295\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2296% 2297\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2298\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2299 2300% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2301% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2302% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2303% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2304% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2305% 2306\def\codequoteright{% 2307 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2308 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2309 '% 2310 \else \char'15 \fi 2311 \else \char'15 \fi 2312} 2313% 2314% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2315% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2316% the code environments to do likewise. 2317% 2318\def\codequoteleft{% 2319 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2320 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2321 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2322 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2323 \relax`% 2324 \else \char'22 \fi 2325 \else \char'22 \fi 2326} 2327 2328% Commands to set the quote options. 2329% 2330\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2331 \def\temp{#1}% 2332 \ifx\temp\onword 2333 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2334 = t% 2335 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2336 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2337 = \relax 2338 \else 2339 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2340 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2341 \fi\fi 2342} 2343% 2344\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2345 \def\temp{#1}% 2346 \ifx\temp\onword 2347 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2348 = t% 2349 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2350 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2351 = \relax 2352 \else 2353 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2354 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2355 \fi\fi 2356} 2357 2358% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2359\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2360 2361% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2362\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2363 2364% Font commands. 2365 2366% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2367% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2368% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2369\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2370 \ifusingtt 2371 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2372 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2373 \next 2374} 2375\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2376\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2377 2378% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2379% character) is such as not to need one. 2380\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2381 \ifx\next,% 2382 \else\ifx\next-% 2383 \else\ifx\next.% 2384 \else\ifx\next\.% 2385 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2386 \else\ptexslash 2387 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2388 \aftersmartic 2389} 2390 2391% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2392\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2393 2394% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2395% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2396\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2397 2398\def\aftersmartic{} 2399\def\var#1{% 2400 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2401 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2402 \smartslanted{#1}% 2403} 2404 2405\let\i=\smartitalic 2406\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2407\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2408\let\emph=\smartitalic 2409 2410% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2411\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2412\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2413\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2414 2415% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2416\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2417\let\strong=\b 2418 2419% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2420\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2421 2422% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2423% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2424% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2425% 2426\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2427\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2428 2429% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2430% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2431% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2432% 2433\catcode`@=11 2434 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2435 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2436 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2437 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2438 } 2439 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2440 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2441 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2442 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2443 } 2444\catcode`@=\other 2445\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2446 2447% @t, explicit typewriter. 2448\def\t#1{% 2449 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2450 \null 2451} 2452 2453% @samp. 2454\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2455 2456% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2457\let\indicateurl=\samp 2458 2459% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2460% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2461% This is a subroutine for that. 2462\def\tclose#1{% 2463 {% 2464 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2465 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2466 % 2467 % Switch to typewriter. 2468 \tt 2469 % 2470 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2471 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2472 % 2473 % Turn off hyphenation. 2474 \nohyphenation 2475 % 2476 \rawbackslash 2477 \plainfrenchspacing 2478 #1% 2479 }% 2480 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2481} 2482 2483% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2484% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2485% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2486% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2487% 2488% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2489% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2490% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2491% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2492{ 2493 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2494 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2495 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2496 % 2497 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2498 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2499 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2500 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2501 \ifallowcodebreaks 2502 \let-\codedash 2503 \let_\codeunder 2504 \else 2505 \let-\normaldash 2506 \let_\realunder 2507 \fi 2508 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2509 % after the hyphen. 2510 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2511 % 2512 \codex 2513 } 2514 % 2515 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2516 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2517 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2518 % 2519 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2520 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2521 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2522 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2523 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2524 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2525 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2526 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2527 \fi 2528 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2529 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2530 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2531 } 2532} 2533\def\normaldash{-} 2534% 2535\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2536 2537\def\codeunder{% 2538 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2539 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2540 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2541 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2542 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2543 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2544 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2545 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2546 {\_}% 2547} 2548 2549% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2550% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2551% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2552% and _ on and off. 2553% 2554\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2555 2556\def\keywordtrue{true} 2557\def\keywordfalse{false} 2558 2559\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2560 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2561 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2562 \allowcodebreakstrue 2563 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2564 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2565 \else 2566 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2567 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2568 \fi\fi 2569} 2570 2571% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2572% so use \code rather than \samp. 2573\let\command=\code 2574\let\env=\code 2575\let\file=\code 2576\let\option=\code 2577 2578% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2579% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2580% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2581% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2582 2583% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2584% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2585\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2586 2587% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2588% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2589% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2590\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2591\let\uref=\urefbreak 2592% 2593\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2594\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2595 \unsepspaces 2596 \pdfurl{#1}% 2597 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2598 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2599 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2600 \else 2601 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 2602 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2603 \ifpdf 2604 \ifurefurlonlylink 2605 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 2606 \unhbox0 2607 \else 2608 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 2609 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 2610 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 2611 \fi 2612 \else 2613 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 2614 \fi 2615 \else 2616 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 2617 \fi 2618 \fi 2619 \endlink 2620\endgroup} 2621 2622% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 2623\def\urefcatcodes{% 2624 \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active 2625 \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active 2626 \catcode\slashChar=\active 2627} 2628{ 2629 \urefcatcodes 2630 % 2631 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 2632 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2633 \urefcatcodes 2634 \let&\urefcodeamp 2635 \let.\urefcodedot 2636 \let#\urefcodehash 2637 \let?\urefcodequest 2638 \let/\urefcodeslash 2639 \codex 2640 } 2641 % 2642 % By default, they are just regular characters. 2643 \global\def&{\normalamp} 2644 \global\def.{\normaldot} 2645 \global\def#{\normalhash} 2646 \global\def?{\normalquest} 2647 \global\def/{\normalslash} 2648} 2649 2650% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 2651% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 2652% cmtt at least, especially for dots. 2653\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} 2654\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} 2655\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 2656\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 2657% 2658\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 2659\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 2660\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 2661\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 2662\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 2663{ 2664 \catcode`\/=\active 2665 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 2666 \urefprestretch \slashChar 2667 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 2668 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 2669 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 2670 } 2671} 2672 2673% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 2674% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 2675% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 2676% 2677\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 2678 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2679 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 2680 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2681 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 2682 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2683 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 2684 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 2685 \else 2686 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2687 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2688 \fi\fi\fi 2689} 2690\def\wordafter{after} 2691\def\wordbefore{before} 2692\def\wordnone{none} 2693 2694\urefbreakstyle after 2695 2696% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2697% 2698\let\url=\uref 2699 2700% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2701% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2702% 2703%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2704\ifpdf 2705 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2706 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2707 \unsepspaces 2708 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2709 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2710 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2711 \endlink 2712 \endgroup} 2713\else 2714 \let\email=\uref 2715\fi 2716 2717% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2718% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2719% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2720\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2721 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2722 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2723 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2724 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2725 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2726 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2727 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2728 \else 2729 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2730 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2731 \fi\fi\fi 2732} 2733\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2734\def\wordexample{example} 2735\def\wordcode{code} 2736 2737% Default is `distinct'. 2738\kbdinputstyle distinct 2739 2740% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2741% then @kbd has no effect. 2742\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 2743 2744\def\xkey{\key} 2745\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 2746 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2747 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2748 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2749 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2750} 2751 2752% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 2753%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2754%\font\keysy=cmsy9 2755%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2756% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2757% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2758% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2759% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2760% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2761 2762% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 2763% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 2764% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 2765% 2766\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 2767 \nohyphenation 2768 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 2769 #1}\null} 2770 2771% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2772\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2773 2774% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2775\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2776\def\click{\arrow} 2777 2778% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2779% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2780% 2781\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2782 2783% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2784% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2785% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2786%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2787 2788% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2789% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2790% all-uppercase. 2791% 2792\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2793\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2794 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2795 \def\temp{#2}% 2796 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2797 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2798 \fi 2799 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2800} 2801 2802% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2803% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2804% 2805\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2806\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2807 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2808 \def\temp{#2}% 2809 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2810 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2811 \fi 2812 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2813} 2814 2815% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 2816% 2817\def\asis#1{#1} 2818 2819% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 2820% 2821% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 2822% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 2823% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 2824% which is what @var uses. 2825{ 2826 \catcode`\_ = \active 2827 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 2828 \catcode`\_=\active 2829 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 2830 } 2831} 2832% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 2833% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 2834% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 2835% 2836% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 2837\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 2838% 2839\def\math{% 2840 \tex 2841 \mathunderscore 2842 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 2843 \mathactive 2844 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 2845 \let\"=\ddot 2846 \let\'=\acute 2847 \let\==\bar 2848 \let\^=\hat 2849 \let\`=\grave 2850 \let\u=\breve 2851 \let\v=\check 2852 \let\~=\tilde 2853 \let\dotaccent=\dot 2854 $\finishmath 2855} 2856\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 2857 2858% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 2859% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 2860% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 2861% 2862{ 2863 \catcode`^ = \active 2864 \catcode`< = \active 2865 \catcode`> = \active 2866 \catcode`+ = \active 2867 \catcode`' = \active 2868 \gdef\mathactive{% 2869 \let^ = \ptexhat 2870 \let< = \ptexless 2871 \let> = \ptexgtr 2872 \let+ = \ptexplus 2873 \let' = \ptexquoteright 2874 } 2875} 2876 2877% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun. 2878\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2879 2880% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 2881% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 2882% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 2883% 2884\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 2885% 2886\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 2887\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 2888 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 2889 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2890} 2891% 2892% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 2893% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 2894\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 2895\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 2896 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 2897 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 2898} 2899% 2900% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 2901% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 2902% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 2903% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 2904% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 2905% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 2906% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 2907% 2908\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 2909\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 2910\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 2911 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 2912 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2913 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 2914} 2915 2916% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 2917% 2918\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 2919\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 2920 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 2921 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 2922 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 2923} 2924 2925% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 2926% 2927\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 2928\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 2929 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 2930 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 2931} 2932 2933 2934\message{glyphs,} 2935% and logos. 2936 2937% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 2938\def\@{\char64 } 2939\let\atchar=\@ 2940 2941% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 2942% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do 2943% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math. 2944\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}} 2945\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}} 2946\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{ 2947\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\} 2948\begingroup 2949 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 2950 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 2951 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 2952 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 2953 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 2954 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 2955 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 2956 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 2957 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 2958!endgroup 2959 2960% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 2961\let\comma = , 2962 2963% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 2964% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 2965\let\, = \ptexc 2966\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 2967\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 2968\let\tieaccent = \ptext 2969\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 2970\let\udotaccent = \d 2971 2972% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 2973% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 2974\def\questiondown{?`} 2975\def\exclamdown{!`} 2976\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 2977\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 2978 2979% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 2980\def\imacro{i} 2981\def\jmacro{j} 2982\def\dotless#1{% 2983 \def\temp{#1}% 2984 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 2985 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 2986 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 2987 \fi\fi 2988} 2989 2990% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 2991% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 2992% 2993\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 2994 2995% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 2996% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 2997% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 2998% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 2999% \scriptscriptstyle). 3000% 3001\def\LaTeX{% 3002 L\kern-.36em 3003 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3004 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3005 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3006 % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3007 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3008 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3009 \else 3010 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3011 \selectfonts\lllsize A% 3012 \fi 3013 }% 3014 \vss 3015 }}% 3016 \kern-.15em 3017 \TeX 3018} 3019 3020% Some math mode symbols. 3021\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 3022\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} 3023\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} 3024\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} 3025 3026% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3027% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3028% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3029% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3030% whichever is larger. 3031% 3032\def\dots{% 3033 \leavevmode 3034 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3035 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3036 \dimen0 = \wd0 3037 \else 3038 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3039 \fi 3040 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3041 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3042 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3043 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3044 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3045 }% 3046} 3047 3048% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3049% 3050\def\enddots{% 3051 \dots 3052 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3053} 3054 3055% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3056% 3057% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3058% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3059% 3060\def\point{$\star$} 3061\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3062\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3063\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3064\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3065\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3066 3067% The @error{} command. 3068% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3069% 3070\newbox\errorbox 3071% 3072{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3073\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3074% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3075\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3076% 3077\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3078 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3079 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3080 \vbox{% 3081 \hrule height\dimen2 3082 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3083 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3084 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3085 \hrule height\dimen2} 3086 \hfil} 3087% 3088\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3089 3090% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3091% 3092\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3093 3094% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3095% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3096% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3097% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3098% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3099% 3100% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3101% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3102% font height. 3103% 3104% feymr - regular 3105% feymo - slanted 3106% feybr - bold 3107% feybo - bold slanted 3108% 3109% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3110% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3111% Hmm. 3112% 3113% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3114% Hope not. 3115% 3116% 3117\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3118\def\eurofont{% 3119 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3120 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3121 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3122 % font installed. 3123 % 3124 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3125 % that to the current nominal size. 3126 % 3127 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3128 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3129 % 3130 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3131 % 3132 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3133 % bold: 3134 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3135 \else 3136 % regular: 3137 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3138 \fi 3139 \thiseurofont 3140} 3141 3142% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3143% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3144% the redefinition. 3145% 3146% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3147\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3148\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3149\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3150\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3151% 3152\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3153\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3154\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3155\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3156\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3157\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3158\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3159\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3160% 3161% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3162% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3163% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3164% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3165% 3166% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3167% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3168% the same EC font. 3169\def\ogonek#1{{% 3170 \def\temp{#1}% 3171 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3172 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3173 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3174 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3175 \else 3176 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3177 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3178 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3179 \fi 3180 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3181 }% 3182} 3183\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3184\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3185\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3186\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3187% 3188% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. 3189\def\ecfont{% 3190 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3191 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3192 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3193 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3194 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3195 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3196 \ifmonospace 3197 % typewriter: 3198 \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3199 \else 3200 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3201 % bold: 3202 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3203 \else 3204 % regular: 3205 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3206 \fi 3207 \fi 3208 \thisecfont 3209} 3210 3211% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3212% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3213% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3214% 3215\def\registeredsymbol{% 3216 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 3217 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3218 }$% 3219} 3220 3221% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3222% 3223\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3224 3225% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3226% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3227% so we'll define it if necessary. 3228% 3229\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3230\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3231\fi 3232 3233% Quotes. 3234\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3235\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3236\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3237\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3238 3239 3240\message{page headings,} 3241 3242\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3243\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3244 3245% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3246\newif\ifseenauthor 3247\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3248 3249% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 3250% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 3251% 3252\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3253 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3254\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3255 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3256 3257\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3258 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3259 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3260 3261\envdef\titlepage{% 3262 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3263 \begingroup 3264 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3265 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3266 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3267 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3268 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3269 % 3270 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3271 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3272 \let\oldpage = \page 3273 \def\page{% 3274 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3275 \finishtitlepage 3276 \fi 3277 \let\page = \oldpage 3278 \page 3279 \null 3280 }% 3281} 3282 3283\def\Etitlepage{% 3284 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3285 \finishtitlepage 3286 \fi 3287 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3288 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3289 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3290 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3291 \oldpage 3292 \endgroup 3293 % 3294 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3295 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3296 \HEADINGSon 3297 % 3298 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 3299 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3300 \shortcontents 3301 \contents 3302 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3303 \global\let\contents = \relax 3304 \fi 3305 % 3306 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3307 \contents 3308 \global\let\contents = \relax 3309 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3310 \fi 3311} 3312 3313\def\finishtitlepage{% 3314 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3315 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3316 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3317} 3318 3319% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3320% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3321% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because 3322% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par 3323% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3324% 3325\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3326 \rmisbold 3327 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3328 \parindent=0pt 3329 \tolerance=5000 3330 \ptexraggedright 3331} 3332 3333% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3334 3335\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 3336\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3337 3338\parseargdef\title{% 3339 \checkenv\titlepage 3340 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3341 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3342 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3343 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3344} 3345 3346\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3347 \checkenv\titlepage 3348 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3349} 3350 3351% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3352% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3353% 3354\parseargdef\author{% 3355 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3356 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3357 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3358 \else 3359 \checkenv\titlepage 3360 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3361 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% 3362 \fi 3363} 3364 3365 3366% Set up page headings and footings. 3367 3368\let\thispage=\folio 3369 3370\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3371\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3372\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3373\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3374 3375% Now make TeX use those variables 3376\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3377 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3378\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3379 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3380\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3381 3382% Commands to set those variables. 3383% For example, this is what @headings on does 3384% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3385% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3386% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3387% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3388 3389 3390\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3391\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3392\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3393\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3394 3395\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3396\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3397\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3398\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3399 3400\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3401 3402\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3403\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3404\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3405\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3406 3407\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3408\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3409\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3410 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3411 % 3412 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3413 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3414 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 3415 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3416} 3417 3418\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3419 3420% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3421% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3422% 3423% The same set of arguments for: 3424% 3425% @oddheadingmarks 3426% @evenfootingmarks 3427% @oddfootingmarks 3428% @everyheadingmarks 3429% @everyfootingmarks 3430 3431\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3432\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3433\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3434\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3435\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3436 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3437\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3438 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3439% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3440\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3441 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3442 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3443} 3444 3445\everyheadingmarks bottom 3446\everyfootingmarks bottom 3447 3448% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3449% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3450% @headings off turns them off. 3451% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3452% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3453% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3454% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3455% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3456% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3457 3458\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3459 3460\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3461 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3462 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3463} 3464 3465\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3466\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3467 3468% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3469% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3470% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3471% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3472% edge of all pages. 3473\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3474\global\pageno=1 3475\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3476\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3477\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3478\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3479\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3480} 3481\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3482 3483% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3484% page number on top right. 3485\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3486\global\pageno=1 3487\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3488\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3489\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3490\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3491\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3492} 3493\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3494 3495\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3496\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3497\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3498\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3499\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3500\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3501\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3502\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3503} 3504 3505\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3506\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3507\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3508\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3509\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3510\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3511\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3512} 3513 3514% Subroutines used in generating headings 3515% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3516% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3517% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3518\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3519\def\today{% 3520 \number\day\space 3521 \ifcase\month 3522 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3523 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3524 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3525 \fi 3526 \space\number\year} 3527\fi 3528 3529% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3530% It generates no output of its own. 3531\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3532\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3533 3534 3535\message{tables,} 3536% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3537 3538% default indentation of table text 3539\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3540% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3541\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3542% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3543\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3544 3545% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3546\newdimen\itemmax 3547 3548% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3549% these defs. 3550% They also define \itemindex 3551% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3552 3553\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3554 3555\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3556 3557\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3558\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3559 3560\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3561 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3562 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3563 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3564 \itemindex{#1}% 3565 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3566 % 3567 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3568 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3569 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3570 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3571 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3572 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3573 % 3574 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3575 % but leave it ragged-right. 3576 \begingroup 3577 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3578 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3579 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3580 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3581 \endgroup 3582 % 3583 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3584 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3585 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3586 % 3587 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3588 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3589 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3590 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3591 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3592 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3593 % 3594 \penalty 10001 3595 \endgroup 3596 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3597 \else 3598 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3599 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3600 \noindent 3601 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3602 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3603 % eventually be printed. 3604 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3605 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3606 \unhbox0 3607 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3608 \endgroup 3609 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3610 \fi 3611} 3612 3613\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3614\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3615 3616% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3617\envdef\table{% 3618 \let\itemindex\gobble 3619 \tablecheck{table}% 3620} 3621\envdef\ftable{% 3622 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3623 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3624} 3625\envdef\vtable{% 3626 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3627 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3628} 3629\def\tablecheck#1{% 3630 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3631 \endgroup 3632 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3633 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3634 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3635 \else 3636 \let\next\tablex 3637 \fi 3638 \next 3639} 3640\def\tablex#1{% 3641 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3642 \parsearg\tabley 3643} 3644\def\tabley#1{% 3645 {% 3646 \makevalueexpandable 3647 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3648 \expandafter 3649 }\temp \endtablez 3650} 3651\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3652 \aboveenvbreak 3653 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3654 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3655 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3656 \itemmax=\tableindent 3657 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3658 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3659 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3660 \parindent = 0pt 3661 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3662 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3663 \let\item = \internalBitem 3664 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3665} 3666\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3667\let\Eftable\Etable 3668\let\Evtable\Etable 3669\let\Eitemize\Etable 3670\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3671 3672% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3673 3674\newcount \itemno 3675 3676\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3677 3678\def\doitemize#1{% 3679 \aboveenvbreak 3680 \itemmax=\itemindent 3681 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3682 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3683 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3684 \parindent=0pt 3685 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3686 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3687 % 3688 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 3689 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 3690 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 3691 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 3692 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 3693 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3694 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 3695 % 3696 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3697 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3698 % 3699 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3700} 3701 3702% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3703% 3704\def\itemizeitem{% 3705 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3706 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3707 {% 3708 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3709 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3710 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3711 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3712 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3713 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3714 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3715 % that's the theory. 3716 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3717 \noindent 3718 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3719 % 3720 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3721 \flushcr 3722} 3723 3724% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3725% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3726% 3727\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3728 3729% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3730% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3731% argument is the same as `1'. 3732% 3733\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3734\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3735 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3736 \def\thearg{#1}% 3737 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3738 % 3739 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3740 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3741 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3742 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3743 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3744 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3745 \ifx\rest\empty 3746 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3747 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3748 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3749 % not equal to itself. 3750 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3751 % 3752 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3753 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3754 % 3755 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3756 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3757 \else 3758 % It's a letter. 3759 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3760 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3761 \else 3762 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3763 \fi 3764 \fi 3765 \else 3766 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3767 \numericenumerate 3768 \fi 3769} 3770 3771% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3772% given in \thearg. 3773% 3774\def\numericenumerate{% 3775 \itemno = \thearg 3776 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3777} 3778 3779% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3780\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3781 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3782 \startenumeration{% 3783 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3784 \ifnum\itemno=0 3785 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3786 alphabet}% 3787 \fi 3788 \char\lccode\itemno 3789 }% 3790} 3791 3792% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3793\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3794 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3795 \startenumeration{% 3796 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3797 \ifnum\itemno=0 3798 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3799 alphabet} 3800 \fi 3801 \char\uccode\itemno 3802 }% 3803} 3804 3805% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3806% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3807% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3808% 3809\def\startenumeration#1{% 3810 \advance\itemno by -1 3811 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3812} 3813 3814% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3815% to @enumerate. 3816% 3817\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3818\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3819\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3820\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3821 3822 3823% @multitable macros 3824% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3825% 3826% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3827% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3828% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3829% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3830 3831% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3832 3833% To make preamble: 3834% 3835% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3836% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3837% @item ... 3838% 3839% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3840% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3841% columns as desired. 3842 3843 3844% Or use a template: 3845% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3846% @item ... 3847% using the widest term desired in each column. 3848 3849% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3850% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3851% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3852% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3853 3854% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3855% if they are. 3856 3857% Sample multitable: 3858 3859% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3860% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3861% @item 3862% first col stuff 3863% @tab 3864% second col stuff 3865% @tab 3866% third col 3867% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3868% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3869% 3870% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3871% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3872% @end multitable 3873 3874% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3875% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3876% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3877% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3878% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3879% to baseline. 3880% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3881% 3882\newskip\multitableparskip 3883\newskip\multitableparindent 3884\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3885\newskip\multitablelinespace 3886\multitableparskip=0pt 3887\multitableparindent=6pt 3888\multitablecolspace=12pt 3889\multitablelinespace=0pt 3890 3891% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3892% 3893\let\endsetuptable\relax 3894\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3895\let\columnfractions\relax 3896\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3897\newif\ifsetpercent 3898 3899% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3900% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3901% 3902\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3903 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3904 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3905 \setuptable 3906} 3907 3908\newcount\colcount 3909\def\setuptable#1{% 3910 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3911 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3912 \let\go = \relax 3913 \else 3914 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3915 \global\setpercenttrue 3916 \else 3917 \ifsetpercent 3918 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3919 \else 3920 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3921 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3922 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3923 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3924 \fi 3925 \fi 3926 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3927 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3928 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3929 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3930 \else 3931 \let\go = \setuptable 3932 \fi% 3933 \fi 3934 \go 3935} 3936 3937% multitable-only commands. 3938% 3939% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 3940% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 3941% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 3942% undo it ourselves. 3943\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 3944\def\headitem{% 3945 \checkenv\multitable 3946 \crcr 3947 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 3948 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 3949 \the\everytab % for the first item 3950}% 3951% 3952% default for tables with no headings. 3953\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 3954% 3955% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3956% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3957% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 3958% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3959\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3960 3961% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3962% 3963\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3964% 3965\envdef\multitable{% 3966 \vskip\parskip 3967 \startsavinginserts 3968 % 3969 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3970 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3971 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3972 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3973 \def\item{\crcr}% 3974 % 3975 \tolerance=9500 3976 \hbadness=9500 3977 \setmultitablespacing 3978 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3979 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3980 \overfullrule=0pt 3981 \global\colcount=0 3982 % 3983 \everycr = {% 3984 \noalign{% 3985 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 3986 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3987 % 3988 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 3989 \checkinserts 3990 % 3991 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 3992 \headitemcrhook 3993 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 3994 }% 3995 }% 3996 % 3997 \parsearg\domultitable 3998} 3999\def\domultitable#1{% 4000 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4001 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4002 % 4003 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4004 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4005 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4006 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4007 \halign\bgroup &% 4008 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4009 \multistrut 4010 \vtop{% 4011 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4012 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4013 % 4014 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4015 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4016 % the first one. 4017 % 4018 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4019 % to the width of each template entry. 4020 % 4021 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4022 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4023 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4024 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4025 % 4026 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4027 \rightskip=0pt 4028 \ifnum\colcount=1 4029 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4030 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4031 \else 4032 \ifsetpercent \else 4033 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4034 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4035 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4036 \fi 4037 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4038 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4039 \fi 4040 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4041 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4042 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4043 % For example: 4044 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4045 % @item @code{#} 4046 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4047 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4048 % marking characters. 4049 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4050 }\cr 4051} 4052\def\Emultitable{% 4053 \crcr 4054 \egroup % end the \halign 4055 \global\setpercentfalse 4056} 4057 4058\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4059 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4060 % 4061 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4062 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4063 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4064 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4065\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4066\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4067\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4068\fi 4069% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4070% table. If not, do nothing. 4071% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4072\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4073\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4074\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4075 % than skip between lines in the table. 4076\fi% 4077\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4078\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4079\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4080 % than skip between lines in the table. 4081\fi} 4082 4083 4084\message{conditionals,} 4085 4086% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4087% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4088% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4089% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4090% attempt to close an environment group. 4091% 4092\def\makecond#1{% 4093 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4094 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4095} 4096\makecond{iftex} 4097\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4098\makecond{ifnothtml} 4099\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4100\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4101\makecond{ifnotxml} 4102 4103% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4104% 4105\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4106\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4107\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4108\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4109\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4110\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4111\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4112\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4113\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4114\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4115\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4116\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4117\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4118 4119% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4120% 4121% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4122\newcount\doignorecount 4123 4124\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4125 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4126 \obeylines 4127 \catcode`\@ = \other 4128 \catcode`\{ = \other 4129 \catcode`\} = \other 4130 % 4131 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4132 \spaceisspace 4133 % 4134 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4135 \doignorecount = 0 4136 % 4137 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4138 \dodoignore{#1}% 4139} 4140 4141{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4142 \obeylines % 4143 % 4144 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4145 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4146 % 4147 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4148 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4149 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4150 % 4151 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4152 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4153 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4154 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4155 % 4156 % And now expand that command. 4157 \doignoretext ^^M% 4158 }% 4159} 4160 4161\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4162 \def\temp{#1}% 4163 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4164 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4165 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4166 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4167 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4168 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4169 \fi 4170 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4171} 4172 4173% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4174% 4175\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4176 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4177 \let\next\enddoignore 4178 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4179 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4180 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4181 \fi 4182 \next 4183} 4184 4185% Finish off ignored text. 4186{ \obeylines% 4187 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4188 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4189 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4190 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4191} 4192 4193 4194% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4195% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4196% 4197% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4198% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4199% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4200% didn't need it. 4201% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4202% 4203\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4204\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4205 {% 4206 \makevalueexpandable 4207 \def\temp{#2}% 4208 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4209 \ifx\temp\empty 4210 \next{}% 4211 \else 4212 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4213 \fi 4214 }% 4215} 4216% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4217\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4218 4219% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4220% 4221\parseargdef\clear{% 4222 {% 4223 \makevalueexpandable 4224 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4225 }% 4226} 4227 4228% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4229\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4230\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4231{ 4232 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4233 % 4234 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4235 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4236 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4237 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4238 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4239 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4240 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4241 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4242 } 4243} 4244 4245% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4246% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4247% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4248% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4249% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4250% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4251% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4252% 4253% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4254% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4255% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4256% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4257% 4258\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4259 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4260 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4261 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4262 \else 4263 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4264 \fi 4265} 4266 4267% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4268% with @set. 4269% 4270% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4271% \makecond and then redefine. 4272% 4273\makecond{ifset} 4274\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4275\def\doifset#1#2{% 4276 {% 4277 \makevalueexpandable 4278 \let\next=\empty 4279 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4280 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4281 \fi 4282 \expandafter 4283 }\next 4284} 4285\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4286 4287% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4288% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4289% 4290% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4291% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4292% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4293% 4294\makecond{ifclear} 4295\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4296\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4297 4298% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4299% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4300% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4301% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4302% 4303\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4304\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4305% 4306\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4307 \makevalueexpandable 4308 \let\next=\empty 4309 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4310 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4311 \fi 4312 \expandafter 4313 }\next 4314} 4315\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4316 4317% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4318\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4319\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4320 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4321\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4322 4323% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4324% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4325\set txicommandconditionals 4326 4327% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4328% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4329\let\dircategory=\comment 4330 4331% @defininfoenclose. 4332\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4333 4334 4335\message{indexing,} 4336% Index generation facilities 4337 4338% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4339% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4340\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4341 4342% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 4343% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 4344% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 4345% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4346% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 4347% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4348% for the sake of vms. 4349% 4350\def\newindex#1{% 4351 \iflinks 4352 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4353 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 4354 \fi 4355 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4356 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4357} 4358 4359% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4360% 4361\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4362 4363% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4364% 4365\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4366% 4367\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4368 \iflinks 4369 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4370 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 4371 \fi 4372 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4373 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4374} 4375 4376 4377% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4378% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4379% 4380% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4381% inside @code. 4382% 4383\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4384\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4385 4386% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4387% #3 the target index (bar). 4388\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4389 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 4390 % closing the target index. 4391 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax 4392 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 4393 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 4394 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 4395 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 4396 \fi 4397 % redefine \fooindfile: 4398 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4399 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4400 % redefine \fooindex: 4401 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4402} 4403 4404% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 4405% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4406% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 4407 4408% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 4409% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 4410 4411% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 4412% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 4413 4414\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 4415\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4416 4417% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4418\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 4419\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4420 4421% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4422% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 4423% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 4424% 4425\def\indexdummies{% 4426 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4427 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 4428 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 4429 % 4430 % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy) 4431 % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more 4432 % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 4433 % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 4434 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we 4435 % should use @lbracechar and @rbracechar? 4436 \def\{{{\tt\char123}}% 4437 \def\}{{\tt\char125}}% 4438 % 4439 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 4440 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 4441 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 4442 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 4443 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 4444 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 4445 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 4446 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 4447 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 4448 % 4449 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 4450 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 4451 % @macro funindex {WORD} 4452 % @findex xyz 4453 % @end macro 4454 % ... 4455 % @funindex commtest 4456 % This is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 4457 % 4458 % Sample whatsit resulting: 4459 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 4460 % 4461 % So: 4462 \let\endinput = \empty 4463 % 4464 % Do the redefinitions. 4465 \commondummies 4466} 4467 4468% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 4469% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 4470% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 4471% this will be simpler. 4472% 4473\def\atdummies{% 4474 \def\@{@@}% 4475 \def\ {@ }% 4476 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 4477 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 4478 % 4479 % Do the redefinitions. 4480 \commondummies 4481 \otherbackslash 4482} 4483 4484% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 4485% 4486\def\commondummies{% 4487 % 4488 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4489 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4490 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4491 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4492 % from whatever follows. 4493 % 4494 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4495 % space. 4496 % 4497 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4498 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4499 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4500 % 4501 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 4502 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 4503 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4504 % 4505 \commondummiesnofonts 4506 % 4507 \definedummyletter\_% 4508 \definedummyletter\-% 4509 % 4510 % Non-English letters. 4511 \definedummyword\AA 4512 \definedummyword\AE 4513 \definedummyword\DH 4514 \definedummyword\L 4515 \definedummyword\O 4516 \definedummyword\OE 4517 \definedummyword\TH 4518 \definedummyword\aa 4519 \definedummyword\ae 4520 \definedummyword\dh 4521 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4522 \definedummyword\l 4523 \definedummyword\o 4524 \definedummyword\oe 4525 \definedummyword\ordf 4526 \definedummyword\ordm 4527 \definedummyword\questiondown 4528 \definedummyword\ss 4529 \definedummyword\th 4530 % 4531 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4532 \definedummyword\bf 4533 \definedummyword\gtr 4534 \definedummyword\hat 4535 \definedummyword\less 4536 \definedummyword\sf 4537 \definedummyword\sl 4538 \definedummyword\tclose 4539 \definedummyword\tt 4540 % 4541 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4542 \definedummyword\TeX 4543 % 4544 % Assorted special characters. 4545 \definedummyword\arrow 4546 \definedummyword\bullet 4547 \definedummyword\comma 4548 \definedummyword\copyright 4549 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4550 \definedummyword\dots 4551 \definedummyword\enddots 4552 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4553 \definedummyword\equiv 4554 \definedummyword\error 4555 \definedummyword\euro 4556 \definedummyword\expansion 4557 \definedummyword\geq 4558 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4559 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4560 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4561 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4562 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4563 \definedummyword\leq 4564 \definedummyword\minus 4565 \definedummyword\ogonek 4566 \definedummyword\pounds 4567 \definedummyword\point 4568 \definedummyword\print 4569 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4570 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4571 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4572 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4573 \definedummyword\quoteright 4574 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4575 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4576 \definedummyword\result 4577 \definedummyword\textdegree 4578 % 4579 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4580 \macrolist 4581 % 4582 \normalturnoffactive 4583 % 4584 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4585 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4586 \makevalueexpandable 4587} 4588 4589% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4590% 4591\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4592 % Control letters and accents. 4593 \definedummyletter\!% 4594 \definedummyaccent\"% 4595 \definedummyaccent\'% 4596 \definedummyletter\*% 4597 \definedummyaccent\,% 4598 \definedummyletter\.% 4599 \definedummyletter\/% 4600 \definedummyletter\:% 4601 \definedummyaccent\=% 4602 \definedummyletter\?% 4603 \definedummyaccent\^% 4604 \definedummyaccent\`% 4605 \definedummyaccent\~% 4606 \definedummyword\u 4607 \definedummyword\v 4608 \definedummyword\H 4609 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4610 \definedummyword\ogonek 4611 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4612 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4613 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4614 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4615 \definedummyword\dotless 4616 % 4617 % Texinfo font commands. 4618 \definedummyword\b 4619 \definedummyword\i 4620 \definedummyword\r 4621 \definedummyword\sansserif 4622 \definedummyword\sc 4623 \definedummyword\slanted 4624 \definedummyword\t 4625 % 4626 % Commands that take arguments. 4627 \definedummyword\abbr 4628 \definedummyword\acronym 4629 \definedummyword\anchor 4630 \definedummyword\cite 4631 \definedummyword\code 4632 \definedummyword\command 4633 \definedummyword\dfn 4634 \definedummyword\dmn 4635 \definedummyword\email 4636 \definedummyword\emph 4637 \definedummyword\env 4638 \definedummyword\file 4639 \definedummyword\image 4640 \definedummyword\indicateurl 4641 \definedummyword\inforef 4642 \definedummyword\kbd 4643 \definedummyword\key 4644 \definedummyword\math 4645 \definedummyword\option 4646 \definedummyword\pxref 4647 \definedummyword\ref 4648 \definedummyword\samp 4649 \definedummyword\strong 4650 \definedummyword\tie 4651 \definedummyword\uref 4652 \definedummyword\url 4653 \definedummyword\var 4654 \definedummyword\verb 4655 \definedummyword\w 4656 \definedummyword\xref 4657 % 4658 % Consider: 4659 % @macro mkind{arg1,arg2} 4660 % @cindex \arg2\ 4661 % @end macro 4662 % @mkind{foo, bar} 4663 % The space after the comma will end up in the temporary definition 4664 % that we make for arg2 (see \parsemargdef ff.). We want all this to be 4665 % expanded for the sake of the index, so we end up just seeing "bar". 4666 \let\xeatspaces = \eatspaces 4667} 4668 4669% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. 4670\newif\ifusebracesinindexes 4671 4672% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4673% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4674% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4675% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4676% 4677\def\indexnofonts{% 4678 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4679 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4680 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4681 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4682 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 4683 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4684 % 4685 \commondummiesnofonts 4686 % 4687 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4688 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4689 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4690 %\let\tt=\asis 4691 % 4692 \def\ { }% 4693 \def\@{@}% 4694 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4695 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 4696 % 4697 % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the 4698 % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings 4699 % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }. 4700 \ifusebracesinindexes 4701 \def\lbracechar{\lbracecmd}% 4702 \def\rbracechar{\rbracecmd}% 4703 \else 4704 \def\lbracechar{|a}% 4705 \def\rbracechar{|b}% 4706 \fi 4707 \let\{=\lbracechar 4708 \let\}=\rbracechar 4709 % 4710 % 4711 % Non-English letters. 4712 \def\AA{AA}% 4713 \def\AE{AE}% 4714 \def\DH{DZZ}% 4715 \def\L{L}% 4716 \def\OE{OE}% 4717 \def\O{O}% 4718 \def\TH{ZZZ}% 4719 \def\aa{aa}% 4720 \def\ae{ae}% 4721 \def\dh{dzz}% 4722 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4723 \def\l{l}% 4724 \def\oe{oe}% 4725 \def\ordf{a}% 4726 \def\ordm{o}% 4727 \def\o{o}% 4728 \def\questiondown{?}% 4729 \def\ss{ss}% 4730 \def\th{zzz}% 4731 % 4732 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4733 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4734 % 4735 % Assorted special characters. 4736 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4737 \def\arrow{->}% 4738 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4739 \def\comma{,}% 4740 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4741 \def\dots{...}% 4742 \def\enddots{...}% 4743 \def\equiv{==}% 4744 \def\error{error}% 4745 \def\euro{euro}% 4746 \def\expansion{==>}% 4747 \def\geq{>=}% 4748 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4749 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4750 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4751 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4752 \def\leq{<=}% 4753 \def\minus{-}% 4754 \def\point{.}% 4755 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4756 \def\print{-|}% 4757 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4758 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4759 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4760 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4761 \def\quoteright{'}% 4762 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4763 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4764 \def\result{=>}% 4765 \def\textdegree{o}% 4766 % 4767 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax 4768 \else \indexlquoteignore \fi 4769 % 4770 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4771 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4772 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4773 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4774 % that starts with \. 4775 % 4776 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4777 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4778 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4779 % 4780 \macrolist 4781} 4782 4783% Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us 4784% ignore left quotes in the sort term. 4785{\catcode`\`=\active 4786 \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}} 4787 4788\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4789\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4790 4791% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4792% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4793\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4794 4795% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4796% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4797% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4798% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4799% 4800\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4801 \iflinks 4802 {% 4803 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4804 \toks0 = {#2}% 4805 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4806 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4807 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4808 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4809 \fi 4810 % 4811 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4812 % 4813 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4814 }% 4815 \fi 4816} 4817 4818% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4819% 4820\def\dosubindwrite{% 4821 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4822 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4823 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4824 \fi 4825 % 4826 % Remember, we are within a group. 4827 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4828 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4829 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4830 % 4831 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4832 % get the string to sort by. 4833 {\indexnofonts 4834 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4835 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4836 }% 4837 % 4838 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4839 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4840 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4841 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4842 % sorted result. 4843 \edef\temp{% 4844 \write\writeto{% 4845 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4846 }% 4847 \temp 4848} 4849 4850% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4851% 4852% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4853% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4854% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4855% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4856% sequences like this: 4857% @end defun 4858% @tindex whatever 4859% @defun ... 4860% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4861% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4862% the previous defun. 4863% 4864% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4865% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4866% 4867% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4868% 4869% But wait, there is a catch there: 4870% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4871% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4872% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4873% representation of the skip. 4874% 4875% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4876% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4877% 4878\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4879% 4880\newskip\whatsitskip 4881\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4882% 4883% ..., ready, GO: 4884% 4885\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 4886 #1% 4887 \else 4888 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4889 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4890 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4891 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4892 % 4893 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4894 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4895 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4896 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4897 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4898 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4899 \else 4900 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4901 \fi 4902 % 4903 #1% 4904 % 4905 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4906 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4907 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4908 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4909 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4910 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4911 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4912 % @vindex index-whatever 4913 % Description. 4914 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4915 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4916 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4917 \else 4918 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4919 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4920 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4921 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4922 \fi 4923\fi} 4924 4925% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4926% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4927% or 4928% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4929% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4930% containing these kinds of lines: 4931% \initial {c} 4932% before the first topic whose initial is c 4933% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4934% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4935% \primary {topic} 4936% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4937% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4938% for each subtopic. 4939 4940% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4941% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4942 4943\def\findex {\fnindex} 4944\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4945\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4946\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4947\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4948\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4949 4950\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4951{\obeylines % 4952\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4953\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4954 4955% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4956 4957% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4958% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4959% 4960\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4961 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4962 % 4963 \smallfonts \rm 4964 \tolerance = 9500 4965 \plainfrenchspacing 4966 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4967 % 4968 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4969 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4970 % \initial {@} 4971 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4972 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4973 \catcode`\@ = 11 4974 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4975 \ifeof 1 4976 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4977 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4978 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4979 % there is some text. 4980 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4981 \else 4982 % 4983 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4984 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4985 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4986 \read 1 to \temp 4987 \ifeof 1 4988 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4989 \else 4990 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4991 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4992 % to make right now. 4993 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4994 \catcode`\\ = 0 4995 \escapechar = `\\ 4996 \begindoublecolumns 4997 \input \jobname.#1s 4998 \enddoublecolumns 4999 \fi 5000 \fi 5001 \closein 1 5002\endgroup} 5003 5004% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5005% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5006 5007\def\initial#1{{% 5008 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 5009 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 5010 % 5011 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5012 \removelastskip 5013 % 5014 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5015 \nobreak 5016 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 5017 \penalty 0 5018 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 5019 % 5020 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5021 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5022 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5023 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5024 % 5025 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5026 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 5027 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 5028 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5029 \nobreak 5030 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5031}} 5032 5033% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5034% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5035% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5036% 5037% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 5038% \def\entry#1#2{... 5039% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 5040% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 5041% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 5042% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 5043% --kasal, 21nov03 5044\def\entry{% 5045 \begingroup 5046 % 5047 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5048 % affect previous text. 5049 \par 5050 % 5051 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 5052 \parfillskip = 0in 5053 % 5054 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5055 \parskip = 0in 5056 % 5057 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5058 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5059 % 5060 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 5061 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 5062 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 5063 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 5064 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 5065 % 5066 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 5067 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 5068 \hangindent = 2em 5069 % 5070 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 5071 % with blank space. 5072 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 5073 % 5074 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 5075 % columns. 5076 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 5077 % 5078 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5079 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5080 % titles, for instance. 5081 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5082 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% 5083 % 5084 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5085 \afterassignment\doentry 5086 \let\temp = 5087} 5088\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5089\def\doentry{% 5090 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5091 \noindent 5092 \aftergroup\finishentry 5093 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5094} 5095\def\finishentry#1{% 5096 % #1 is the page number. 5097 % 5098 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 5099 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 5100 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 5101 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 5102 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 5103 \ % 5104 \else 5105 % 5106 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 5107 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 5108 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 5109 \hfil\penalty50 5110 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5111 % 5112 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 5113 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 5114 % \hbox ensues. 5115 \ifpdf 5116 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5117 \ \the\toksA 5118 \else 5119 \ #1% 5120 \fi 5121 \fi 5122 \par 5123 \endgroup 5124} 5125 5126% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5127\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5128 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 5129 5130\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5131 5132\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5133\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5134 \parfillskip=0in 5135 \parskip=0in 5136 \hangindent=1in 5137 \hangafter=1 5138 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5139 \ifpdf 5140 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5141 \else 5142 #2 5143 \fi 5144 \par 5145}} 5146 5147% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5148% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5149% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5150\catcode`\@=11 5151 5152\newbox\partialpage 5153\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5154 5155\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5156 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5157 \output = {% 5158 % 5159 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5160 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5161 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5162 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5163 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5164 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5165 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5166 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5167 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5168 \fi 5169 % 5170 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5171 % Unvbox the main output page. 5172 \unvbox\PAGE 5173 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5174 }% 5175 }% 5176 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5177 % 5178 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5179 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5180 % 5181 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5182 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5183 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5184 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5185 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5186 % 5187 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5188 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5189 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5190 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5191 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5192 % 5193 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5194 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5195 % been clobbered. 5196 % 5197 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5198 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5199 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5200 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5201 % 5202 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 5203 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 5204 \vsize = 2\vsize 5205} 5206 5207% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5208% the last. 5209% 5210\def\doublecolumnout{% 5211 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5212 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5213 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5214 % previous page. 5215 \dimen@ = \vsize 5216 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5217 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 5218 % 5219 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5220 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 5221 \onepageout\pagesofar 5222 \unvbox255 5223 \penalty\outputpenalty 5224} 5225% 5226% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5227% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5228\def\pagesofar{% 5229 \unvbox\partialpage 5230 % 5231 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5232 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5233 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5234} 5235% 5236% All done with double columns. 5237\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5238 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5239 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5240 % following situation: 5241 % 5242 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5243 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5244 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5245 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5246 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5247 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5248 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5249 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5250 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5251 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5252 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5253 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5254 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5255 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5256 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5257 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5258 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5259 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 5260 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5261 % 5262 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5263 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5264 \penalty0 5265 % 5266 \output = {% 5267 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 5268 % current page, no automatic page break. 5269 \balancecolumns 5270 % 5271 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 5272 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 5273 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5274 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5275 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 5276 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 5277 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 5278 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5279 }% 5280 \eject 5281 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5282 % 5283 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5284 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5285 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 5286 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 5287 \pagegoal = \vsize 5288} 5289% 5290% Called at the end of the double column material. 5291\def\balancecolumns{% 5292 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5293 \dimen@ = \ht0 5294 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5295 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5296 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5297 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 5298 \splittopskip = \topskip 5299 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 5300 {% 5301 \vbadness = 10000 5302 \loop 5303 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5304 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5305 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 5306 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5307 \repeat 5308 }% 5309 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 5310 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 5311 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 5312 % 5313 \pagesofar 5314} 5315\catcode`\@ = \other 5316 5317 5318\message{sectioning,} 5319% Chapters, sections, etc. 5320 5321% Let's start with @part. 5322\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5323\def\partzzz#1{% 5324 \chapoddpage 5325 \null 5326 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5327 \begingroup 5328 \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text 5329 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5330 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5331 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5332 \chapoddpage 5333 \endgroup 5334} 5335 5336% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5337% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5338% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5339% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5340% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5341\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5342\newcount\chapno 5343\newcount\secno \secno=0 5344\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5345\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5346 5347% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5348\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 5349% 5350% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 5351% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 5352% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 5353% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 5354% 5355\def\appendixletter{% 5356 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 5357 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 5358 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 5359 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 5360 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 5361 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 5362 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 5363 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 5364 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 5365 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 5366 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 5367 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 5368 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 5369 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 5370 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 5371 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 5372 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 5373 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 5374 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 5375 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 5376 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 5377 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 5378 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 5379 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 5380 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 5381 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 5382 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 5383 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 5384 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 5385 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 5386 \else\char\the\appendixno 5387 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 5388 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 5389 5390% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 5391% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 5392% these. @section does likewise. 5393\def\thischapter{} 5394\def\thischapternum{} 5395\def\thischaptername{} 5396\def\thissection{} 5397\def\thissectionnum{} 5398\def\thissectionname{} 5399 5400\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 5401\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 5402 5403% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 5404\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 5405\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 5406 5407% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 5408\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 5409\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 5410 5411% we only have subsub. 5412\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 5413% 5414% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 5415% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 5416\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 5417% 5418% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 5419% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 5420\def\chapheadtype{N} 5421 5422% Choose a heading macro 5423% #1 is heading type 5424% #2 is heading level 5425% #3 is text for heading 5426\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 5427 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 5428 \absseclevel=#2 5429 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 5430 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 5431 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 5432 \absseclevel = 0 5433 \else 5434 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 5435 \absseclevel = 3 5436 \fi 5437 \fi 5438 % The heading type: 5439 \def\headtype{#1}% 5440 \if \headtype U% 5441 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 5442 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 5443 \fi 5444 \else 5445 % Check for appendix sections: 5446 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 5447 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 5448 \else 5449 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 5450 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 5451 \fi\fi 5452 \fi 5453 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 5454 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 5455 \def\headtype{U}% 5456 \else 5457 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 5458 \fi 5459 \fi 5460 % Now print the heading: 5461 \if \headtype U% 5462 \ifcase\absseclevel 5463 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 5464 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 5465 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5466 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5467 \fi 5468 \else 5469 \if \headtype A% 5470 \ifcase\absseclevel 5471 \appendixzzz{#3}% 5472 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 5473 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 5474 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5475 \fi 5476 \else 5477 \ifcase\absseclevel 5478 \chapterzzz{#3}% 5479 \or \seczzz{#3}% 5480 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5481 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5482 \fi 5483 \fi 5484 \fi 5485 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5486} 5487 5488% an interface: 5489\def\numhead{\genhead N} 5490\def\apphead{\genhead A} 5491\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 5492 5493% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 5494% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 5495% 5496% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 5497% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 5498\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5499% 5500\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 5501\def\chapterzzz#1{% 5502 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 5503 % as an @include file. 5504 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5505 \global\advance\chapno by 1 5506 % 5507 % Used for \float. 5508 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 5509 \resetallfloatnos 5510 % 5511 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 5512 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 5513 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 5514 % 5515 % Write the actual heading. 5516 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 5517 % 5518 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 5519 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 5520 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5521 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5522} 5523 5524\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 5525% 5526\def\appendixzzz#1{% 5527 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5528 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 5529 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 5530 \resetallfloatnos 5531 % 5532 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 5533 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 5534 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 5535 % 5536 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 5537 % 5538 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 5539 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 5540 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 5541} 5542 5543% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 5544\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 5545\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 5546 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5547 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 5548 % 5549 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 5550 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5551 \resetallfloatnos 5552 % 5553 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 5554 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 5555 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 5556 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 5557 % to be executed, not expanded). 5558 % 5559 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 5560 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 5561 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 5562 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 5563 % the toc entries.) 5564 \toks0 = {#1}% 5565 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 5566 % 5567 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 5568 % 5569 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 5570 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 5571 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 5572} 5573 5574% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 5575\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 5576 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 5577 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 5578 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 5579 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 5580 \unnmhead0{#1}% 5581 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5582} 5583 5584% @top is like @unnumbered. 5585\let\top\unnumbered 5586 5587% Sections. 5588% 5589\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 5590\def\seczzz#1{% 5591 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5592 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 5593} 5594 5595% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 5596\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 5597\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 5598 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5599 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 5600} 5601\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 5602 5603% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 5604\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 5605\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 5606 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5607 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 5608} 5609 5610% Subsections. 5611% 5612% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 5613\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 5614\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 5615 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5616 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5617} 5618 5619% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 5620\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 5621\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 5622 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5623 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5624 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5625} 5626 5627% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 5628\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 5629\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5630 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5631 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5632 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5633} 5634 5635% Subsubsections. 5636% 5637% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 5638\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 5639\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5640 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5641 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5642 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5643} 5644 5645% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 5646\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 5647\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5648 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5649 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5650 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5651} 5652 5653% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 5654\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 5655\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5656 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5657 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5658 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5659} 5660 5661% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5662% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5663% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5664\let\section = \numberedsec 5665\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5666\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5667 5668% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5669 5670\def\majorheading{% 5671 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5672 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5673} 5674 5675\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5676\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5677 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5678 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5679 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5680} 5681 5682% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5683\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5684 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5685\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5686 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5687\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5688 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5689 5690% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5691% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5692% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5693 5694% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5695\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5696 5697% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5698\newskip\chapheadingskip 5699 5700% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 5701\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5702\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5703% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5704% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5705% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5706\def\chapoddpage{% 5707 \chappager 5708 \ifodd\pageno \else 5709 \begingroup 5710 \headingsoff 5711 \null 5712 \chappager 5713 \endgroup 5714 \fi 5715} 5716 5717\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5718 5719\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5720\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5721\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5722\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5723 5724\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5725\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5726\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5727\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5728\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5729 5730\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5731\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5732\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5733\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5734\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5735 5736\CHAPPAGon 5737 5738% Chapter opening. 5739% 5740% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5741% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5742% 5743% To test against our argument. 5744\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5745\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5746\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5747% 5748\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5749 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5750 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5751 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5752 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5753 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5754 % 5755 \def\temptype{#2}% 5756 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5757 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5758 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5759 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5760 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5761 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5762 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5763 \toks0={#1}% 5764 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5765 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5766 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5767 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 5768 % commands in some of the translations. 5769 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 5770 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5771 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5772 }% 5773 \else 5774 \toks0={#1}% 5775 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5776 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5777 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5778 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 5779 % commands in some of the translations. 5780 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 5781 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5782 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5783 }% 5784 \fi\fi\fi 5785 % 5786 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5787 % the preceding space. 5788 \safewhatsit\domark 5789 % 5790 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5791 \pchapsepmacro 5792 % 5793 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5794 % between here and the heading. 5795 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5796 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5797 \domark 5798 % 5799 {% 5800 \chapfonts \rmisbold 5801 % 5802 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5803 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5804 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5805 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5806 % 5807 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5808 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5809 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5810 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5811 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5812 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5813 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5814 \def\toctype{omit}% 5815 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5816 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5817 \def\toctype{app}% 5818 \else 5819 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5820 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5821 \fi\fi\fi 5822 % 5823 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5824 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5825 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5826 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5827 % 5828 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5829 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5830 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5831 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5832 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5833 \donoderef{#2}% 5834 % 5835 % Typeset the actual heading. 5836 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5837 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5838 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5839 }% 5840 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5841 \nobreak 5842} 5843 5844% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5845\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5846\def\centerparameters{% 5847 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5848 \leftskip = \rightskip 5849 \parfillskip = 0pt 5850} 5851 5852 5853% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5854% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5855% 5856\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5857% 5858\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5859 \chapoddpage 5860 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5861 \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak 5862} 5863\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5864\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5865\par\penalty 5000 % 5866} 5867\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5868 \chapoddpage 5869 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}% 5870 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5871} 5872\def\CHAPFopen{% 5873 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5874 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5875 5876 5877% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5878% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5879% 5880\newskip\secheadingskip 5881\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5882 5883% Subsection titles. 5884\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5885\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5886 5887% Subsubsection titles. 5888\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5889\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5890 5891 5892% Print any size, any type, section title. 5893% 5894% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5895% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5896% section number. 5897% 5898\def\seckeyword{sec} 5899% 5900\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5901 {% 5902 \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment. 5903 % 5904 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5905 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold 5906 % 5907 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5908 \def\temptype{#3}% 5909 % 5910 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5911 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5912 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5913 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5914 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5915 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5916 \fi 5917 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5918 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5919 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5920 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5921 \toks0={#1}% 5922 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5923 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5924 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5925 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5926 % commands in some of the translations. 5927 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5928 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5929 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5930 }% 5931 \fi 5932 \else 5933 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5934 \toks0={#1}% 5935 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5936 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5937 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5938 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5939 % commands in some of the translations. 5940 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5941 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5942 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5943 }% 5944 \fi 5945 \fi\fi\fi 5946 % 5947 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 5948 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 5949 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 5950 \par 5951 % 5952 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5953 % the preceding space. 5954 \safewhatsit\domark 5955 % 5956 % Insert space above the heading. 5957 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5958 % 5959 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5960 % between here and the heading. 5961 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5962 \domark 5963 % 5964 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5965 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5966 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5967 \def\toctype{unn}% 5968 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5969 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5970 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5971 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5972 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5973 \def\toctype{omit}% 5974 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5975 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5976 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5977 \def\toctype{app}% 5978 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5979 \else 5980 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5981 \def\toctype{num}% 5982 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5983 \fi\fi\fi 5984 % 5985 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5986 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5987 % 5988 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5989 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5990 \donoderef{#3}% 5991 % 5992 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5993 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5994 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5995 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5996 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5997 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5998 \nobreak 5999 % 6000 % Output the actual section heading. 6001 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6002 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6003 \unhbox0 #1}% 6004 }% 6005 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6006 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6007 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6008 % 6009 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6010 % was followed by glue. 6011 \nobreak 6012 % 6013 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6014 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6015 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6016 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6017 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6018 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6019 \vskip-\parskip 6020 % 6021 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6022 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6023 % and do the needful. 6024 \penalty 10001 6025} 6026 6027 6028\message{toc,} 6029% Table of contents. 6030\newwrite\tocfile 6031 6032% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6033% Called from @chapter, etc. 6034% 6035% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6036% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6037% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6038% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6039% destination to jump to. 6040% 6041% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6042% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6043% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6044% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6045% 6046\newif\iftocfileopened 6047\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6048% 6049\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6050 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6051 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6052 \iftocfileopened\else 6053 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6054 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6055 \fi 6056 % 6057 \iflinks 6058 {\atdummies 6059 \edef\temp{% 6060 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6061 \temp 6062 }% 6063 \fi 6064 \fi 6065 % 6066 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6067 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6068 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6069 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6070 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6071 % `1', and two named `2'. 6072 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 6073} 6074 6075 6076% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6077% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6078% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6079% 6080\def\activecatcodes{% 6081 \catcode`\"=\active 6082 \catcode`\$=\active 6083 \catcode`\<=\active 6084 \catcode`\>=\active 6085 \catcode`\\=\active 6086 \catcode`\^=\active 6087 \catcode`\_=\active 6088 \catcode`\|=\active 6089 \catcode`\~=\active 6090} 6091 6092 6093% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6094\def\readtocfile{% 6095 \setupdatafile 6096 \activecatcodes 6097 \input \tocreadfilename 6098} 6099 6100\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6101\newcount\savepageno 6102\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6103 6104% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6105% 6106\def\startcontents#1{% 6107 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6108 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6109 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6110 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6111 \contentsalignmacro 6112 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6113 % 6114 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6115 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6116 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6117 % 6118 \savepageno = \pageno 6119 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6120 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6121 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6122 % 6123 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6124 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6125} 6126 6127% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6128% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6129% 6130\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6131 6132% Normal (long) toc. 6133% 6134\def\contents{% 6135 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6136 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6137 \ifeof 1 \else 6138 \readtocfile 6139 \fi 6140 \vfill \eject 6141 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6142 \ifeof 1 \else 6143 \pdfmakeoutlines 6144 \fi 6145 \closein 1 6146 \endgroup 6147 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6148 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6149} 6150 6151% And just the chapters. 6152\def\summarycontents{% 6153 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6154 % 6155 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6156 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6157 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6158 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6159 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6160 \secfonts 6161 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6162 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6163 \rm 6164 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6165 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6166 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6167 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6168 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6169 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6170 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6171 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6172 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6173 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6174 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6175 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6176 \ifeof 1 \else 6177 \readtocfile 6178 \fi 6179 \closein 1 6180 \vfill \eject 6181 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6182 \endgroup 6183 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6184 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6185} 6186\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6187 6188% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6189% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6190% 6191\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6192 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6193 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6194 % But use \hss just in case. 6195 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6196 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6197 % 6198 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6199 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6200 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6201 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6202 % there are before deciding ... 6203 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6204} 6205 6206% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6207% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6208% The last argument is the page number. 6209% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6210 6211% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6212% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6213% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6214\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6215\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} 6216% 6217% Parts, in the short toc. 6218\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6219 \penalty-300 6220 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6221 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6222} 6223 6224% Chapters, in the main contents. 6225\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6226% 6227% Chapters, in the short toc. 6228% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6229\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6230 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6231} 6232 6233% Appendices, in the main contents. 6234% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6235% 6236\def\appendixbox#1{% 6237 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6238 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6239 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6240% 6241\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6242 6243% Unnumbered chapters. 6244\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6245\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6246 6247% Sections. 6248\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6249\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6250\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6251 6252% Subsections. 6253\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6254\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6255\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6256 6257% And subsubsections. 6258\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6259\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6260\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6261 6262% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6263% Same as \defaultparindent. 6264\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6265 6266% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6267% page number. 6268% 6269% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6270% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6271\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6272 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6273 \begingroup 6274 \chapentryfonts 6275 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6276 \endgroup 6277 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6278} 6279 6280\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6281 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6282 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6283\endgroup} 6284 6285\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6286 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6287 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6288\endgroup} 6289 6290\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6291 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6292 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6293\endgroup} 6294 6295% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6296\let\tocentry = \entry 6297 6298% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6299\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6300 6301\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6302\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6303 6304\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6305\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6306\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6307\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6308 6309 6310\message{environments,} 6311% @foo ... @end foo. 6312 6313% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6314% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6315% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6316 6317\envdef\tex{% 6318 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 6319 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6320 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6321 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6322 \catcode `\%=14 6323 \catcode `\+=\other 6324 \catcode `\"=\other 6325 \catcode `\|=\other 6326 \catcode `\<=\other 6327 \catcode `\>=\other 6328 \catcode `\`=\other 6329 \catcode `\'=\other 6330 \escapechar=`\\ 6331 % 6332 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6333 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6334 \mathactive 6335 % 6336 \let\b=\ptexb 6337 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6338 \let\c=\ptexc 6339 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6340 \let\.=\ptexdot 6341 \let\dots=\ptexdots 6342 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 6343 \let\!=\ptexexclam 6344 \let\i=\ptexi 6345 \let\indent=\ptexindent 6346 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 6347 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 6348 \let\+=\tabalign 6349 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 6350 \let\/=\ptexslash 6351 \let\*=\ptexstar 6352 \let\t=\ptext 6353 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 6354 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 6355 % 6356 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 6357 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 6358 \def\@{@}% 6359} 6360% There is no need to define \Etex. 6361 6362% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 6363% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 6364% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 6365 6366% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 6367\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 6368 6369% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 6370% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 6371% have any width. 6372\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 6373 6374% This space is always present above and below environments. 6375\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 6376 6377% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 6378% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 6379% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 6380% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 6381% 6382\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 6383 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 6384 % \sectionheading, q.v. 6385 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 6386 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 6387 \endgraf 6388 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 6389 \removelastskip 6390 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 6391 % or better ... 6392 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 6393 \vskip\envskipamount 6394 \fi 6395 \fi 6396}} 6397 6398\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 6399 6400% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 6401% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 6402\let\nonarrowing=\relax 6403 6404% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 6405% environment contents. 6406\font\circle=lcircle10 6407\newdimen\circthick 6408\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 6409\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 6410\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 6411% 6412\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 6413\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 6414\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 6415\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 6416\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6417 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 6418 \hskip\rskip}} 6419\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6420 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 6421 \hskip\rskip}} 6422% 6423\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 6424 6425\envdef\cartouche{% 6426 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 6427 \startsavinginserts 6428 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 6429 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 6430 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 6431 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 6432 \cartouter=\hsize 6433 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 6434 % side, and for 6pt waste from 6435 % each corner char, and rule thickness 6436 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 6437 % 6438 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 6439 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 6440 % collide with the section heading. 6441 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 6442 % 6443 \vbox\bgroup 6444 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 6445 \carttop 6446 \hbox\bgroup 6447 \hskip\lskip 6448 \vrule\kern3pt 6449 \vbox\bgroup 6450 \kern3pt 6451 \hsize=\cartinner 6452 \baselineskip=\normbskip 6453 \lineskip=\normlskip 6454 \parskip=\normpskip 6455 \vskip -\parskip 6456 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 6457} 6458\def\Ecartouche{% 6459 \ifhmode\par\fi 6460 \kern3pt 6461 \egroup 6462 \kern3pt\vrule 6463 \hskip\rskip 6464 \egroup 6465 \cartbot 6466 \egroup 6467 \checkinserts 6468} 6469 6470 6471% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 6472% inside a group. 6473\newdimen\nonfillparindent 6474\def\nonfillstart{% 6475 \aboveenvbreak 6476 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 6477 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 6478 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 6479 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 6480 \parskip = 0pt 6481 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 6482 % the normal \indent. 6483 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 6484 \parindent = 0pt 6485 \let\indent\nonfillindent 6486 % 6487 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 6488 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6489 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6490 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 6491 \else 6492 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6493 \fi 6494 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 6495} 6496 6497\begingroup 6498\obeyspaces 6499% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 6500% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 6501% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 6502% @indent. 6503\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 6504\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 6505\ifx\temp % 6506\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 6507\else% 6508\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 6509\fi% 6510}% 6511\endgroup 6512\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 6513\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 6514 6515% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 6516% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 6517% This affects the following displayed environments: 6518% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 6519% 6520\def\smallword{small} 6521\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 6522\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 6523\def\setnormaldispenv{% 6524 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 6525 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 6526 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 6527 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 6528 % to change the fonts afterward. 6529 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6530 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6531 \fi 6532} 6533\def\setsmalldispenv{% 6534 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 6535 \else 6536 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6537 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6538 \fi 6539} 6540 6541% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 6542% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 6543\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 6544 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 6545 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 6546 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6547 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6548} 6549 6550% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 6551\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 6552 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 6553 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 6554} 6555% 6556% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 6557% @example: same as @lisp. 6558% 6559% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 6560% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 6561% 6562\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 6563 \nonfillstart 6564 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 6565 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 6566 \gobble % eat return 6567} 6568% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 6569% 6570\makedispenvdef{display}{% 6571 \nonfillstart 6572 \gobble 6573} 6574 6575% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 6576% 6577\makedispenvdef{format}{% 6578 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6579 \nonfillstart 6580 \gobble 6581} 6582 6583% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 6584\envdef\flushleft{% 6585 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6586 \nonfillstart 6587 \gobble 6588} 6589\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 6590 6591% @flushright. 6592% 6593\envdef\flushright{% 6594 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6595 \nonfillstart 6596 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 6597 \gobble 6598} 6599\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 6600 6601 6602% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 6603% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special 6604% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right 6605% should be enough. 6606\envdef\raggedright{% 6607 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 6608 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% 6609 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% 6610} 6611\let\Eraggedright\par 6612 6613\envdef\raggedleft{% 6614 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 6615 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6616 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6617 % badness reporting. 6618} 6619\let\Eraggedleft\par 6620 6621\envdef\raggedcenter{% 6622 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 6623 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6624 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6625 % badness reporting. 6626} 6627\let\Eraggedcenter\par 6628 6629 6630% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 6631% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 6632% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 6633% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 6634% 6635\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 6636% 6637\def\quotationstart{% 6638 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 6639 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6640 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 6641 \fi 6642 \parsearg\quotationlabel 6643} 6644 6645% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 6646% doing normal filling. 6647% 6648\def\Equotation{% 6649 \par 6650 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 6651 % indent a bit. 6652 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 6653 \fi 6654 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6655} 6656\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 6657 6658% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 6659\def\quotationlabel#1{% 6660 \def\temp{#1}% 6661 \ifx\temp\empty \else 6662 {\bf #1: }% 6663 \fi 6664} 6665 6666% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 6667% has no optional argument. 6668% 6669\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 6670% 6671\def\indentedblockstart{% 6672 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 6673 \parindent=0pt 6674 % 6675 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 6676 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6677 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6678 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 6679 \else 6680 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6681 \fi 6682} 6683 6684% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 6685% 6686\def\Eindentedblock{% 6687 \par 6688 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6689} 6690\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 6691 6692 6693% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 6694% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 6695% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 6696% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 6697% 6698% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6699% 6700% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6701% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6702% verbatim line. 6703\def\dospecials{% 6704 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6705 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6706 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6707 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 6708 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 6709 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 6710 %\do\`\do\'% 6711} 6712% 6713% [Knuth] p. 380 6714\def\uncatcodespecials{% 6715 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6716% 6717% Setup for the @verb command. 6718% 6719% Eight spaces for a tab 6720\begingroup 6721 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6722 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6723\endgroup 6724% 6725\def\setupverb{% 6726 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6727 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6728 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 6729 \tabeightspaces 6730 % Respect line breaks, 6731 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6732 % make each space count 6733 % must do in this order: 6734 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6735} 6736 6737% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6738% 6739% Real tab expansion. 6740\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6741% 6742% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 6743% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 6744% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 6745% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 6746% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 6747% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 6748\newbox\verbbox 6749\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 6750% 6751\begingroup 6752 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6753 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6754 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6755 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6756 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6757 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 6758 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6759 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6760 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 6761 }% 6762 } 6763\endgroup 6764 6765% start the verbatim environment. 6766\def\setupverbatim{% 6767 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6768 \nonfillstart 6769 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6770 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 6771 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 6772 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 6773 \tabexpand 6774 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 6775 % Respect line breaks, 6776 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6777 % make each space count. 6778 % Must do in this order: 6779 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6780 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6781} 6782 6783% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6784% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6785% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6786% 6787% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6788% 6789% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6790\begingroup 6791 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6792 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6793\endgroup 6794% 6795\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6796% 6797% 6798% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6799% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6800% 6801% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6802% 6803% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6804% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6805% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6806% 6807% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6808% 6809\begingroup 6810 \catcode`\ =\active 6811 \obeylines % 6812 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6813 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6814 % line in the output. 6815 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6816 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6817 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6818\endgroup 6819% 6820\envdef\verbatim{% 6821 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6822} 6823\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6824 6825 6826% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6827% 6828\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6829% 6830\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6831 {% 6832 \makevalueexpandable 6833 \setupverbatim 6834 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 6835 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 6836 \input #1 6837 \afterenvbreak 6838 }% 6839} 6840 6841% @copying ... @end copying. 6842% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6843% 6844% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6845% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6846% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6847% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6848% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6849% possible is very desirable. 6850% 6851\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6852\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6853% 6854\def\insertcopying{% 6855 \begingroup 6856 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6857 \scanexp\copyingtext 6858 \endgroup 6859} 6860 6861 6862\message{defuns,} 6863% @defun etc. 6864 6865\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6866\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6867\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6868\newcount\defunpenalty 6869 6870% Start the processing of @deffn: 6871\def\startdefun{% 6872 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6873 \medbreak 6874 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6875 % following @def command, see below. 6876 \else 6877 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6878 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6879 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6880 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6881 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6882 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6883 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6884 % 6885 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6886 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6887 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6888 % @def command. 6889 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6890 % 6891 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6892 % But do insert the glue. 6893 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6894 \fi 6895 % 6896 \parindent=0in 6897 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6898 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6899} 6900 6901\def\dodefunx#1{% 6902 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6903 \checkenv#1% 6904 % 6905 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6906 % It's not a great place, though. 6907 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6908 % 6909 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6910 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6911} 6912\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6913 6914% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6915% 6916\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6917 \begingroup 6918 % call \deffnheader: 6919 #1#2 \endheader 6920 % common ending: 6921 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6922 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 6923 \endgraf 6924 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6925 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6926 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6927 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6928 \checkparencounts 6929 \endgroup 6930} 6931 6932\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6933 6934% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6935% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 6936% 6937\def\makedefun#1{% 6938 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6939 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6940 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6941 \temp 6942} 6943 6944% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6945% 6946% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6947% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6948% 6949\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6950 \envdef#1{% 6951 \startdefun 6952 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 6953 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6954 }% 6955 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6956 \def#3% 6957} 6958 6959\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 6960\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 6961 6962% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 6963% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 6964% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 6965% 6966\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 6967 \def\temp{#1}% 6968 \ifx\temp\onword 6969 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6970 = \empty 6971 \else\ifx\temp\offword 6972 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6973 = \relax 6974 \else 6975 \errhelp = \EMsimple 6976 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 6977 must be on|off}% 6978 \fi\fi 6979} 6980 6981% Untyped functions: 6982 6983% @deffn category name args 6984\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6985 6986% @deffn category class name args 6987\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6988 6989% \defopon {category on}class name args 6990\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6991 6992% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6993% 6994\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6995 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6996 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6997 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6998} 6999 7000% Typed functions: 7001 7002% @deftypefn category type name args 7003\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7004 7005% @deftypeop category class type name args 7006\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7007 7008% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7009\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7010 7011% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7012% 7013\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7014 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7015 \doingtypefntrue 7016 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7017} 7018 7019% Typed variables: 7020 7021% @deftypevr category type var args 7022\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7023 7024% @deftypecv category class type var args 7025\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7026 7027% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7028\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7029 7030% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7031% 7032\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7033 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7034 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7035} 7036 7037% Untyped variables: 7038 7039% @defvr category var args 7040\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7041 7042% @defcv category class var args 7043\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7044 7045% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7046\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7047 7048% Types: 7049 7050% @deftp category name args 7051\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7052 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7053 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7054} 7055 7056% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7057\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7058\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7059\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7060\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7061\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7062\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7063\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7064\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7065\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7066\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7067\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7068 7069% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7070% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7071% #2 is the return type, if any. 7072% #3 is the function name. 7073% 7074% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7075% 7076\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7077 \par 7078 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7079 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7080 % 7081 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7082 % on a line by itself. 7083 \rettypeownlinefalse 7084 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7085 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7086 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7087 \rettypeownlinetrue 7088 \fi 7089 \fi 7090 % 7091 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7092 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7093 % just below it. 7094 \def\temp{#1}% 7095 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7096 % 7097 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7098 % least two. 7099 \tempnum = 2 7100 % 7101 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7102 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7103 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7104 % 7105 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7106 \ifrettypeownline 7107 \advance\tempnum by 1 7108 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7109 \else 7110 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7111 \fi 7112 % 7113 % The continuations: 7114 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7115 % 7116 % The final paragraph shape: 7117 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7118 % 7119 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7120 \noindent 7121 \hbox to 0pt{% 7122 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7123 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7124 \kern\leftskip 7125 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7126 }% 7127 % 7128 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7129 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7130 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7131 {% 7132 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7133 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7134 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7135 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7136 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7137 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7138 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7139 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7140 \df \tt 7141 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7142 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7143 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7144 \ifrettypeownline 7145 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7146 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7147 \else 7148 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7149 \fi 7150 \fi % no return type 7151 #3% output function name 7152 }% 7153 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 7154 % 7155 \boldbrax 7156 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7157} 7158 7159% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7160% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7161% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7162% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7163% 7164\def\defunargs#1{% 7165 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7166 % tt for the names. 7167 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7168 % 7169 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7170 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7171 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7172 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7173 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7174 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7175 #1% 7176 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7177} 7178 7179% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7180% 7181\def\activeparens{% 7182 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7183 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7184 \catcode`\&=\active 7185} 7186 7187% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7188\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7189 7190% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7191% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7192% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7193{ 7194 \activeparens 7195 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7196 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7197 \global\let& = \& 7198 7199 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7200 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7201} 7202 7203\newcount\parencount 7204 7205% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7206\newif\ifampseen 7207\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7208 7209\def\parenfont{% 7210 \ifampseen 7211 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7212 % otherwise use the default font. 7213 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7214 \else 7215 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7216 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7217 \sf 7218 \fi 7219} 7220\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7221 \ifampseen 7222 \ifnum\parencount=1 7223 #1% 7224 \fi 7225 \fi 7226} 7227\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7228 7229\def\opnr{% 7230 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7231 {\parenfont(}% 7232 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7233} 7234\def\clnr{% 7235 {\parenfont)}% 7236 \infirstlevel \sl 7237 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7238} 7239 7240\newcount\brackcount 7241\def\lbrb{% 7242 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7243 {\bf[}% 7244} 7245\def\rbrb{% 7246 {\bf]}% 7247 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7248} 7249 7250\def\checkparencounts{% 7251 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7252 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7253} 7254% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7255% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7256\def\badparencount{% 7257 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7258 \global\parencount=0 7259} 7260\def\badbrackcount{% 7261 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7262 \global\brackcount=0 7263} 7264 7265 7266\message{macros,} 7267% @macro. 7268 7269% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7270% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7271\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7272 \newwrite\macscribble 7273 \def\scantokens#1{% 7274 \toks0={#1}% 7275 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7276 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7277 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7278 \input \jobname.tmp 7279 } 7280\fi 7281 7282\def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup 7283 \newlinechar`\^^M 7284 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 7285 % 7286 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 7287 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 7288 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 7289 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 7290 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 7291 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 7292 % 7293 % ... and for \example: 7294 \spaceisspace 7295 % 7296 % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as 7297 % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not 7298 % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two 7299 % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX 7300 % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in 7301 % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and 7302 % line-oriented commands. 7303 % 7304 \scantokens{#1\empty}% 7305\endgroup} 7306 7307\def\scanexp#1{% 7308 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 7309 \temp 7310} 7311 7312\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 7313\newtoks\macname % Macro name 7314\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 7315 7316% List of all defined macros in the form 7317% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 7318% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 7319% if there is a need. 7320\def\macrolist{} 7321 7322% Add the macro to \macrolist 7323\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 7324\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 7325 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 7326 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 7327} 7328 7329% Utility routines. 7330% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 7331% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 7332% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 7333% 7334\def\cslet#1#2{% 7335 \expandafter\let 7336 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 7337 \csname#2\endcsname 7338} 7339 7340% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 7341% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 7342{\catcode`\@=11 7343\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 7344\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 7345\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 7346\def\unbrace#1{#1} 7347\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 7348} 7349 7350% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 7351{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 7352\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 7353\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 7354\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 7355} 7356 7357% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 7358% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 7359% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 7360% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 7361% 7362% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 7363% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 7364% confine the change to the current group. 7365% 7366% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 7367% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 7368% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 7369% 7370\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 7371 \catcode`\"=\other 7372 \catcode`\+=\other 7373 \catcode`\<=\other 7374 \catcode`\>=\other 7375 \catcode`\@=\other 7376 \catcode`\^=\other 7377 \catcode`\_=\other 7378 \catcode`\|=\other 7379 \catcode`\~=\other 7380 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 7381} 7382 7383\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 7384 \scanctxt 7385 \catcode`\\=\other 7386 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7387} 7388 7389\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 7390 \scanctxt 7391 \catcode`\{=\other 7392 \catcode`\}=\other 7393 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7394 \usembodybackslash 7395} 7396 7397\def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations 7398 \scanctxt 7399 \catcode`\\=0 7400} 7401% why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes" 7402% for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands" 7403% that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document. 7404% 7405% We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for 7406% this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we 7407% define for @math can't be used with @macro calls): 7408% 7409\def\\{\normalbackslash}% 7410% 7411% We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does. 7412% But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a 7413% cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead. 7414% 7415% \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind. 7416 7417 7418% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 7419% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 7420% where N is the macro parameter number. 7421% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 7422% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 7423% 7424{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 7425 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 7426 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 7427} 7428\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 7429 7430\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 7431 7432\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 7433\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 7434 7435\def\macroxxx#1{% 7436 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 7437 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 7438 \paramno=0\relax 7439 \else 7440 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 7441 \if\paramno>256\relax 7442 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7443 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7444 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 7445 \fi 7446 \fi 7447 \fi 7448 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 7449 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 7450 \else 7451 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 7452 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 7453 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 7454 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 7455 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 7456 \fi 7457 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 7458 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 7459 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 7460 \fi} 7461 7462\parseargdef\unmacro{% 7463 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 7464 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 7465 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 7466 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 7467 \begingroup 7468 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 7469 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 7470 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 7471 \endgroup 7472 \else 7473 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 7474 \fi 7475} 7476 7477% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 7478% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 7479% 7480\def\unmacrodo#1{% 7481 \ifx #1\relax 7482 % remove this 7483 \else 7484 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 7485 \fi 7486} 7487 7488% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 7489% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 7490% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 7491\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 7492\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 7493\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 7494\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 7495 7496% For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names. 7497\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 7498\catcode `@=11\relax 7499 7500% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 7501% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH 7502% in the params list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If 7503% there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 7504% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 7505% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 7506% 7507% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 7508% 7509% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 7510% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 7511% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 7512% it to # just before using the token list produced. 7513% 7514% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 7515% the macro is used. 7516% 7517% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 7518% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 7519% processed again to replace the arguments. 7520% 7521% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 7522% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 7523% the catcode regime underwhich the body was input). 7524% 7525% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 7526% arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an 7527% error is produced. 7528\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 7529 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 7530 \let\hash\relax 7531 \let\xeatspaces\relax 7532 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 7533 % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 7534 % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 7535 % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 7536 % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 7537 % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 7538 % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 7539 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 7540 \paramno0\relax 7541 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 7542 \fi 7543} 7544\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 7545 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7546 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 7547 \advance\paramno by 1 7548 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 7549 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 7550 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 7551 \fi\next} 7552 7553\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 7554 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7555 \else 7556 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 7557 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 7558 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 7559 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 7560 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 7561 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 7562 % \xdef . 7563 \expandafter\edef\tempa 7564 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 7565 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7566 \fi\next} 7567 7568% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 7569% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 7570% 7571 7572\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode 7573\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 7574{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7575\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 7576{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7577\catcode `\@=11\relax 7578 7579\let\endargs@\relax 7580\let\nil@\relax 7581\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 7582\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 7583 7584% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 7585% definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros 7586% macarg.ARGNAME 7587% 7588% #1 is the macro name 7589% #2 is the list of argument names 7590% #3 is the list of argument values 7591\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 7592 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 7593 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 7594 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 7595 \def\macroname{#1}% 7596 \begingroup 7597 \macroargctxt 7598 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 7599 \def\@tempa{#3}% 7600 \ifx\@tempa\empty 7601 \setemptyargvalues@ 7602 \else 7603 \getargvals@@ 7604 \fi 7605} 7606 7607% 7608\def\getargvals@@{% 7609 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7610 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 7611 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7612 \else 7613 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7614 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 7615 \fi 7616 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7617 \else 7618 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7619 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 7620 % macros to empty. 7621 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7622 \else 7623 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 7624 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 7625 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 7626 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 7627 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 7628 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 7629 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 7630 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 7631 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7632 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 7633 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 7634 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 7635 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 7636 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 7637 \let\next\getargvals@@ 7638 \fi 7639 \fi 7640 \next 7641} 7642 7643\def\push@#1#2{% 7644 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 7645 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 7646 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 7647 \expandafter#1#2}% 7648} 7649 7650% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 7651% in macro \@tempa 7652\def\macvalstoargs@{% 7653 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 7654 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 7655 % values into respective token registers. 7656 % 7657 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 7658 \begingroup 7659 \paramno0\relax 7660 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 7661 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 7662 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 7663 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 7664 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 7665 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 7666 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 7667 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 7668 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 7669 % group. 7670 \expandafter 7671 \endgroup 7672 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7673 } 7674 7675\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 7676 %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 7677 \expandafter 7678 \endgroup 7679 \macargdeflist@ 7680 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 7681 % is in \@tempa . 7682 \macvalstoargs@ 7683 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 7684 % with \@tempb . 7685 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 7686 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 7687 % \egroup . 7688 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 7689 \let\@tempc\relax 7690 \else 7691 \let\@tempc\egroup 7692 \fi 7693 % And now we do the real job: 7694 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 7695 \@tempd 7696} 7697 7698\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 7699 \if#1;\let\next\relax 7700 \else 7701 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 7702 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 7703 % alias \@tempb . 7704 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 7705 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 7706 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 7707 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 7708 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7709 \fi 7710 \next 7711} 7712 7713% Save the token stack pointer into macro #1 7714\def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}} 7715% Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1 7716\def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax} 7717% newtoks that can be used non \outer . 7718\def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi} 7719 7720% Tailing missing arguments are set to empty 7721\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 7722 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7723 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7724 \else 7725 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 7726 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7727 \fi 7728 \next 7729} 7730 7731\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 7732 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 7733 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 7734 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 7735 \def\paramlist{#2}% 7736} 7737 7738% #1 is the element target macro 7739% #2 is the list macro 7740% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 7741\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7742 \def#1{#3}% 7743 \def#2{#4}% 7744} 7745\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7746 \long\def#1{#3}% 7747 \long\def#2{#4}% 7748} 7749 7750% This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and 7751% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 7752% Much magic with \expandafter here. 7753% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 7754% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 7755% 7756\def\defmacro{% 7757 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 7758 \ifrecursive 7759 \ifcase\paramno 7760 % 0 7761 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7762 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7763 \or % 1 7764 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7765 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7766 \noexpand\braceorline 7767 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7768 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7769 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7770 \else 7771 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9 7772 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7773 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7774 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7775 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7776 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7777 \expandafter\expandafter 7778 \expandafter\xdef 7779 \expandafter\expandafter 7780 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7781 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7782 \else % 10 or more 7783 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7784 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7785 }% 7786 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7787 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 7788 \fi 7789 \fi 7790 \else 7791 \ifcase\paramno 7792 % 0 7793 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7794 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7795 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7796 \or % 1 7797 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7798 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7799 \noexpand\braceorline 7800 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7801 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7802 \egroup 7803 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7804 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7805 \else % at most 9 7806 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 7807 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7808 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7809 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7810 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7811 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7812 \expandafter\expandafter 7813 \expandafter\xdef 7814 \expandafter\expandafter 7815 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7816 \paramlist{% 7817 \egroup 7818 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7819 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7820 \else % 10 or more: 7821 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7822 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7823 }% 7824 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7825 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse 7826 \fi 7827 \fi 7828 \fi} 7829 7830\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax 7831 7832\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 7833 7834% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 7835% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 7836% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 7837% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg). 7838% 7839\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 7840\def\braceorlinexxx{% 7841 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 7842 \expandafter\parsearg 7843 \fi \macnamexxx} 7844 7845 7846% @alias. 7847% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 7848% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 7849% 7850\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 7851\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 7852\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 7853 {% 7854 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 7855 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 7856 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 7857 }% 7858 \next 7859} 7860 7861 7862\message{cross references,} 7863 7864\newwrite\auxfile 7865\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 7866\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 7867 7868% @inforef is relatively simple. 7869\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 7870\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 7871 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 7872 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 7873 7874% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 7875% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 7876% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 7877% @node foo , bar , ... 7878% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 7879% 7880\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 7881% 7882% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 7883% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 7884\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 7885\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 7886 7887\let\nwnode=\node 7888\let\lastnode=\empty 7889 7890% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 7891% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 7892% 7893\def\donoderef#1{% 7894 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 7895 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 7896 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 7897 \fi 7898} 7899 7900% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 7901% 7902\newcount\savesfregister 7903% 7904\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 7905\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 7906\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 7907 7908% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 7909% anchor), which consists of three parts: 7910% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 7911% or the anchor name. 7912% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 7913% empty for anchors. 7914% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 7915% 7916% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 7917% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 7918% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 7919% 7920\def\setref#1#2{% 7921 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 7922 \iflinks 7923 {% 7924 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 7925 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 7926 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 7927 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 7928 }% 7929 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 7930 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 7931 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 7932 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 7933 }% 7934 \fi 7935} 7936 7937% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 7938% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 7939% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 7940% variable, now it's official. 7941% 7942\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 7943 \def\temp{#1}% 7944 \ifx\temp\onword 7945 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7946 = \empty 7947 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7948 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7949 = \relax 7950 \else 7951 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7952 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 7953 must be on|off}% 7954 \fi\fi 7955} 7956 7957% 7958% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 7959% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 7960% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 7961% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 7962% 7963\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7964\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7965\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7966% 7967\newbox\toprefbox 7968\newbox\printedrefnamebox 7969\newbox\infofilenamebox 7970\newbox\printedmanualbox 7971% 7972\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 7973 \unsepspaces 7974 % 7975 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 7976 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 7977 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 7978 % 7979 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 7980 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 7981 % 7982 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 7983 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 7984 % 7985 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 7986 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 7987 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 7988 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 7989 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 7990 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 7991 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7992 \else 7993 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 7994 % the square brackets if we have it. 7995 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 7996 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 7997 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7998 \else 7999 \ifhavexrefs 8000 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8001 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8002 \else 8003 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8004 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8005 \fi% 8006 \fi 8007 \fi 8008 \fi 8009 % 8010 % Make link in pdf output. 8011 \ifpdf 8012 {\indexnofonts 8013 \turnoffactive 8014 \makevalueexpandable 8015 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8016 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8017 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8018 \getfilename{#4}% 8019 % 8020 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8021 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8022 \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 8023 \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty 8024 \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets 8025 \else 8026 \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars 8027 \fi 8028 % 8029 \leavevmode 8030 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8031 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8032 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 8033 \else 8034 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 8035 \fi 8036 }% 8037 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8038 \fi 8039 % 8040 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8041 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 8042 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 8043 {% 8044 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8045 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8046 \indexnofonts 8047 \turnoffactive 8048 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8049 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8050 }% 8051 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8052 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8053 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8054 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8055 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8056 \else 8057 \printedrefname 8058 \fi 8059 % 8060 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8061 % "in MANUALNAME". 8062 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8063 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8064 \fi 8065 \else 8066 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8067 % 8068 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8069 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8070 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8071 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8072 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8073 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8074 % 8075 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8076 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8077 % 8078 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8079 % 8080 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8081 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8082 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8083 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8084 % 8085 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8086 % 8087 \else 8088 % Reference within this manual. 8089 % 8090 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8091 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8092 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8093 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8094 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8095 {\turnoffactive 8096 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8097 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8098 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8099 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8100 }% 8101 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8102 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8103 % 8104 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8105 ,\space 8106 % 8107 % output the `page 3'. 8108 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8109 \fi\fi 8110 \fi 8111 \endlink 8112\endgroup} 8113 8114% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8115% 8116% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8117% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8118% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8119% 8120% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8121% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8122% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8123% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8124% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8125% 8126% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8127% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8128% 8129\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8130 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8131 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8132 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8133 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8134 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8135 \fi 8136 \fi 8137 #1% 8138} 8139 8140% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 8141% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 8142% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 8143% one that Bob is working on :). 8144% 8145\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 8146 8147% Things referred to by \setref. 8148% 8149\def\Ynothing{} 8150\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 8151\def\Ynumbered{% 8152 \ifnum\secno=0 8153 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 8154 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8155 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 8156 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8157 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8158 \else 8159 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8160 \fi\fi\fi 8161} 8162\def\Yappendix{% 8163 \ifnum\secno=0 8164 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 8165 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8166 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 8167 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8168 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8169 \else 8170 \putwordSection@tie 8171 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8172 \fi\fi\fi 8173} 8174 8175% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 8176% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 8177% 8178\def\refx#1#2{% 8179 {% 8180 \indexnofonts 8181 \otherbackslash 8182 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 8183 \csname XR#1\endcsname 8184 }% 8185 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 8186 % If not defined, say something at least. 8187 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 8188 \iflinks 8189 \ifhavexrefs 8190 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 8191 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 8192 \else 8193 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 8194 \global\warnedxrefstrue 8195 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 8196 \fi 8197 \fi 8198 \fi 8199 \else 8200 % It's defined, so just use it. 8201 \thisrefX 8202 \fi 8203 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 8204} 8205 8206% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 8207% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 8208% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 8209% 8210\def\xrdef#1#2{% 8211 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 8212 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 8213 % mess up the control sequence name. 8214 \indexnofonts 8215 \turnoffactive 8216 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 8217 }% 8218 % 8219 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 8220 % 8221 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 8222 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 8223 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 8224 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 8225 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 8226 % 8227 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 8228 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 8229 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 8230 \else 8231 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 8232 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 8233 \fi 8234 % 8235 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 8236 % for later use in \listoffloats. 8237 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 8238 {\safexrefname}}% 8239 \fi 8240} 8241 8242% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 8243% 8244\def\tryauxfile{% 8245 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 8246 \ifeof 1 \else 8247 \readdatafile{aux}% 8248 \global\havexrefstrue 8249 \fi 8250 \closein 1 8251} 8252 8253\def\setupdatafile{% 8254 \catcode`\^^@=\other 8255 \catcode`\^^A=\other 8256 \catcode`\^^B=\other 8257 \catcode`\^^C=\other 8258 \catcode`\^^D=\other 8259 \catcode`\^^E=\other 8260 \catcode`\^^F=\other 8261 \catcode`\^^G=\other 8262 \catcode`\^^H=\other 8263 \catcode`\^^K=\other 8264 \catcode`\^^L=\other 8265 \catcode`\^^N=\other 8266 \catcode`\^^P=\other 8267 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 8268 \catcode`\^^R=\other 8269 \catcode`\^^S=\other 8270 \catcode`\^^T=\other 8271 \catcode`\^^U=\other 8272 \catcode`\^^V=\other 8273 \catcode`\^^W=\other 8274 \catcode`\^^X=\other 8275 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 8276 \catcode`\^^[=\other 8277 \catcode`\^^\=\other 8278 \catcode`\^^]=\other 8279 \catcode`\^^^=\other 8280 \catcode`\^^_=\other 8281 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 8282 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 8283 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 8284 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 8285 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 8286 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 8287 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 8288 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 8289 % 8290 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 8291 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 8292 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 8293 % 8294 \catcode`\^=\other 8295 % 8296 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 8297 \catcode`\~=\other 8298 \catcode`\[=\other 8299 \catcode`\]=\other 8300 \catcode`\"=\other 8301 \catcode`\_=\other 8302 \catcode`\|=\other 8303 \catcode`\<=\other 8304 \catcode`\>=\other 8305 \catcode`\$=\other 8306 \catcode`\#=\other 8307 \catcode`\&=\other 8308 \catcode`\%=\other 8309 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 8310 % 8311 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 8312 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 8313 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 8314 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 8315 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 8316 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 8317 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 8318 \catcode`\\=\other 8319 % 8320 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 8321 {% 8322 \count1=128 8323 \def\loop{% 8324 \catcode\count1=\other 8325 \advance\count1 by 1 8326 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 8327 }% 8328 }% 8329 % 8330 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 8331 \catcode`\{=1 8332 \catcode`\}=2 8333 \catcode`\@=0 8334} 8335 8336\def\readdatafile#1{% 8337\begingroup 8338 \setupdatafile 8339 \input\jobname.#1 8340\endgroup} 8341 8342 8343\message{insertions,} 8344% including footnotes. 8345 8346\newcount \footnoteno 8347 8348% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 8349% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 8350% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 8351% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 8352% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 8353\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 8354 8355% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 8356\let\footnotestyle=\comment 8357 8358{\catcode `\@=11 8359% 8360% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 8361\gdef\footnote{% 8362 \let\indent=\ptexindent 8363 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 8364 % 8365 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 8366 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 8367 % 8368 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 8369 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 8370 \let\@sf\empty 8371 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 8372 % 8373 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 8374 \unskip 8375 \thisfootno\@sf 8376 \dofootnote 8377}% 8378 8379% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 8380% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 8381% 8382% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 8383% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 8384% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 8385% 8386\gdef\dofootnote{% 8387 \insert\footins\bgroup 8388 % 8389 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 8390 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 8391 \let\footnote=\errfootnote 8392 % 8393 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 8394 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 8395 % So reset some parameters. 8396 \hsize=\pagewidth 8397 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 8398 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 8399 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 8400 \floatingpenalty\@MM 8401 \leftskip\z@skip 8402 \rightskip\z@skip 8403 \spaceskip\z@skip 8404 \xspaceskip\z@skip 8405 \parindent\defaultparindent 8406 % 8407 \smallfonts \rm 8408 % 8409 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 8410 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 8411 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 8412 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 8413 \let\noindent = \relax 8414 % 8415 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 8416 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 8417 \everypar = {\hang}% 8418 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 8419 % 8420 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 8421 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 8422 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 8423 \footstrut 8424 % 8425 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 8426 \futurelet\next\fo@t 8427} 8428}%end \catcode `\@=11 8429 8430\def\errfootnote{% 8431 \errhelp=\EMsimple 8432 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 8433 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 8434} 8435 8436% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 8437% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 8438% would be lost. 8439% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 8440% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 8441% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 8442% 8443% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 8444% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 8445% out prematurely. 8446% 8447\def\startsavinginserts{% 8448 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 8449 \let\insert\saveinsert 8450 \else 8451 \let\checkinserts\relax 8452 \fi 8453} 8454 8455% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 8456% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 8457% 8458\def\saveinsert#1{% 8459 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 8460 \afterassignment\next 8461 % swallow the left brace 8462 \let\temp = 8463} 8464\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 8465\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 8466 8467\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 8468 8469\def\placesaveins#1{% 8470 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 8471 {\box#1}% 8472} 8473 8474% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 8475{ 8476 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 8477 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 8478} 8479 8480% initialization: 8481\def\newsaveins #1{% 8482 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 8483 \next 8484} 8485\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 8486 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 8487 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 8488 \checksaveins #1}% 8489} 8490 8491% initialize: 8492\let\checkinserts\empty 8493\newsaveins\footins 8494\newsaveins\margin 8495 8496 8497% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 8498% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 8499% 8500% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 8501% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 8502% undone and the next image would fail. 8503\openin 1 = epsf.tex 8504\ifeof 1 \else 8505 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 8506 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 8507 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 8508 \input epsf.tex 8509\fi 8510\closein 1 8511% 8512% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 8513\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 8514\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 8515 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 8516 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 8517% 8518\def\image#1{% 8519 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 8520 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 8521 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 8522 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 8523 \global\warnednoepsftrue 8524 \fi 8525 \else 8526 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 8527 \fi 8528} 8529% 8530% Arguments to @image: 8531% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 8532% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 8533% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 8534% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 8535% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 8536\newif\ifimagevmode 8537\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 8538 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 8539 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 8540 % If the image is by itself, center it. 8541 \ifvmode 8542 \imagevmodetrue 8543 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 8544 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 8545 \imagevmodetrue 8546 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 8547 \fi\fi 8548 % 8549 \ifimagevmode 8550 \nobreak\medskip 8551 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 8552 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 8553 % above and below. 8554 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 8555 \nobreak 8556 \fi 8557 % 8558 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 8559 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 8560 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 8561 % normal paragraph indentation. 8562 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 8563 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 8564 % eradicate the centering. 8565 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 8566 % 8567 % Output the image. 8568 \ifpdf 8569 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 8570 \else 8571 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 8572 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 8573 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 8574 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 8575 \fi 8576 % 8577 \ifimagevmode 8578 \medskip % space after a standalone image 8579 \fi 8580 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 8581\endgroup} 8582 8583 8584% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 8585% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 8586% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 8587% 8588\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 8589 8590% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 8591\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 8592 8593% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 8594% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 8595% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 8596% 8597% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 8598% be referable. 8599% 8600% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 8601% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 8602% 8603% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 8604% chapter-level command. 8605\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 8606% 8607\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 8608 \let\thiscaption=\empty 8609 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 8610 % 8611 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 8612 % 8613 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 8614 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 8615 % 8616 \startsavinginserts 8617 % 8618 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 8619 \par 8620 % 8621 \vtop\bgroup 8622 \def\floattype{#1}% 8623 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 8624 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 8625 % 8626 \ifx\floattype\empty 8627 \let\safefloattype=\empty 8628 \else 8629 {% 8630 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8631 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8632 \indexnofonts 8633 \turnoffactive 8634 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8635 }% 8636 \fi 8637 % 8638 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 8639 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8640 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 8641 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 8642 % 8643 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 8644 \global\advance\floatno by 1 8645 % 8646 {% 8647 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 8648 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 8649 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 8650 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 8651 % lists of floats. 8652 % 8653 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 8654 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 8655 }% 8656 \fi 8657 % 8658 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 8659 \vskip\parskip 8660 % 8661 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 8662 \restorefirstparagraphindent 8663} 8664 8665% we have these possibilities: 8666% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 8667% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 8668% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 8669% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 8670% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 8671% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 8672% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 8673% @float & no caption: 8674% 8675\def\Efloat{% 8676 \let\floatident = \empty 8677 % 8678 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 8679 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 8680 % 8681 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 8682 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8683 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 8684 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 8685 \fi 8686 % the number. 8687 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8688 \fi 8689 % 8690 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 8691 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 8692 \let\captionline = \floatident 8693 % 8694 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 8695 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 8696 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 8697 \fi 8698 % 8699 % caption text. 8700 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 8701 \fi 8702 % 8703 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 8704 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 8705 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 8706 \vskip.5\parskip 8707 \captionline 8708 % 8709 % Space below caption. 8710 \vskip\parskip 8711 \fi 8712 % 8713 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 8714 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 8715 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8716 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 8717 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 8718 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 8719 {% 8720 \atdummies 8721 % 8722 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 8723 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 8724 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 8725 \scanexp{% 8726 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 8727 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 8728 \thiscaption 8729 \else 8730 \thisshortcaption 8731 \fi 8732 }% 8733 }% 8734 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 8735 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 8736 }% 8737 \fi 8738 \egroup % end of \vtop 8739 % 8740 % place the captured inserts 8741 % 8742 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 8743 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 8744 % float. --kasal, 26may04 8745 % 8746 \checkinserts 8747} 8748 8749% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 8750% 8751\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 8752 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 8753} 8754 8755% @caption, @shortcaption 8756% 8757\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 8758\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 8759\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 8760\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 8761 8762% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 8763% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 8764\def\getfloatno#1{% 8765 \ifx#1\relax 8766 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 8767 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 8768 % 8769 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 8770 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 8771 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 8772 \fi 8773 \let\floatno#1% 8774} 8775 8776% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 8777% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 8778% first read the @float command. 8779% 8780\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8781 8782% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 8783% distinguish floats from other xref types. 8784\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 8785 8786% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 8787% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 8788% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 8789% 8790\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 8791% 8792% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 8793% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 8794% 8795\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 8796 \def\temp{#1}% 8797 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 8798 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 8799} 8800 8801% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 8802% 8803\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 8804 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 8805 {% 8806 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8807 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8808 \indexnofonts 8809 \turnoffactive 8810 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8811 }% 8812 % 8813 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 8814 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 8815 \ifhavexrefs 8816 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 8817 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 8818 \fi 8819 \else 8820 \begingroup 8821 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 8822 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 8823 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 8824 \endgroup 8825 \fi 8826} 8827 8828% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 8829% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 8830% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 8831% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 8832% 8833% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 8834% they won't appear in the aux file). 8835% 8836\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 8837\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 8838 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 8839 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 8840 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 8841 % in pdf output. 8842 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 8843 % 8844 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 8845 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 8846 \writeentry 8847}} 8848 8849 8850\message{localization,} 8851 8852% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 8853% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 8854% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 8855% 8856{ 8857 \catcode`\_ = \active 8858 \globaldefs=1 8859\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 8860 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 8861 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 8862 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 8863 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8864 \ifeof 1 8865 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 8866 \else 8867 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8868 \input txi-#1.tex 8869 \fi 8870 \closein 1 8871 \endgroup % end raw TeX 8872} 8873% 8874% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 8875% try txi-de.tex. 8876% 8877\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 8878 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8879 \ifeof 1 8880 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 8881 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 8882 \else 8883 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8884 \input txi-#1.tex 8885 \fi 8886 \closein 1 8887} 8888}% end of special _ catcode 8889% 8890\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 8891is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 8892directory should work if nowhere else does.} 8893 8894% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 8895% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 8896% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 8897% 8898% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 8899% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 8900% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 8901% 8902% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 8903% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 8904% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 8905% accented characters problem.) 8906% 8907\catcode`@=11 8908\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 8909 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 8910 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 8911 \message{no patterns for #1}% 8912 \else 8913 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 8914 \fi 8915 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 8916 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 8917 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 8918} 8919 8920% Helpers for encodings. 8921% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 8922% 8923\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 8924 \count255=128 8925 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8926 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 8927 \advance\count255 by 1 8928 \repeat 8929} 8930 8931\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 8932 \count255=128 8933 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8934 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 8935 \advance\count255 by 1 8936 \repeat 8937} 8938 8939% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 8940% according to the specified encoding. 8941% 8942\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 8943 % Encoding being declared for the document. 8944 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 8945 % 8946 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 8947 % to compare them with \ifx. 8948 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 8949 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 8950 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 8951 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 8952 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 8953 % 8954 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 8955 \asciichardefs 8956 % 8957 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 8958 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8959 \lattwochardefs 8960 % 8961 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 8962 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8963 \latonechardefs 8964 % 8965 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 8966 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8967 \latninechardefs 8968 % 8969 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 8970 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8971 \utfeightchardefs 8972 % 8973 \else 8974 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 8975 % 8976 \fi % utfeight 8977 \fi % latnine 8978 \fi % latone 8979 \fi % lattwo 8980 \fi % ascii 8981} 8982 8983% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 8984% the default font encoding (OT1). 8985% 8986\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 8987 8988% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 8989\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 8990 8991% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 8992% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 8993% macros containing the character definitions. 8994\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8995% 8996% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 8997\def\latonechardefs{% 8998 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 8999 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 9000 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 9001 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 9002 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 9003 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 9004 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 9005 \gdef^^a7{\S} 9006 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 9007 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 9008 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 9009 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} 9010 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 9011 \gdef^^ad{\-} 9012 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 9013 \gdef^^af{\={}} 9014 % 9015 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 9016 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 9017 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 9018 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 9019 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 9020 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 9021 \gdef^^b6{\P} 9022 % 9023 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 9024 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9025 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 9026 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 9027 % 9028 \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright} 9029 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 9030 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 9031 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 9032 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 9033 % 9034 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 9035 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 9036 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 9037 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 9038 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 9039 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 9040 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 9041 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 9042 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 9043 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 9044 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 9045 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 9046 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 9047 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 9048 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 9049 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 9050 % 9051 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 9052 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 9053 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 9054 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 9055 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 9056 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 9057 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 9058 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 9059 \gdef^^d8{\O} 9060 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 9061 \gdef^^da{\'U} 9062 \gdef^^db{\^U} 9063 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 9064 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 9065 \gdef^^de{\TH} 9066 \gdef^^df{\ss} 9067 % 9068 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 9069 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 9070 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 9071 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 9072 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 9073 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 9074 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 9075 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 9076 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 9077 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 9078 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 9079 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 9080 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 9081 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 9082 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 9083 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 9084 % 9085 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 9086 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 9087 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 9088 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9089 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9090 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 9091 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9092 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9093 \gdef^^f8{\o} 9094 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 9095 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9096 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 9097 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9098 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9099 \gdef^^fe{\th} 9100 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 9101} 9102 9103% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 9104\def\latninechardefs{% 9105 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 9106 \latonechardefs 9107 % 9108 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 9109 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 9110 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 9111 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 9112 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 9113 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 9114 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 9115 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 9116} 9117 9118% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 9119\def\lattwochardefs{% 9120 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 9121 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 9122 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 9123 \gdef^^a3{\L} 9124 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 9125 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 9126 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 9127 \gdef^^a7{\S} 9128 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 9129 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 9130 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 9131 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 9132 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 9133 \gdef^^ad{\-} 9134 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 9135 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 9136 % 9137 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 9138 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 9139 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 9140 \gdef^^b3{\l} 9141 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 9142 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 9143 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 9144 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 9145 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9146 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 9147 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 9148 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 9149 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 9150 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 9151 \gdef^^be{\v z} 9152 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 9153 % 9154 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 9155 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 9156 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 9157 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 9158 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 9159 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 9160 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 9161 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 9162 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 9163 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 9164 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 9165 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 9166 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 9167 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 9168 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 9169 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 9170 % 9171 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 9172 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 9173 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 9174 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 9175 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 9176 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 9177 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 9178 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 9179 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 9180 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 9181 \gdef^^da{\'U} 9182 \gdef^^db{\H U} 9183 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 9184 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 9185 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 9186 \gdef^^df{\ss} 9187 % 9188 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 9189 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 9190 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 9191 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 9192 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 9193 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 9194 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 9195 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 9196 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 9197 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 9198 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 9199 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 9200 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 9201 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9202 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9203 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 9204 % 9205 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 9206 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 9207 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 9208 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9209 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9210 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 9211 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9212 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9213 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 9214 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 9215 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9216 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 9217 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9218 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9219 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 9220 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 9221} 9222 9223% UTF-8 character definitions. 9224% 9225% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 9226% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 9227% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 9228% 9229\newcount\countUTFx 9230\newcount\countUTFy 9231\newcount\countUTFz 9232 9233\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 9234 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 9235% 9236\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 9237 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 9238% 9239\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 9240 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 9241 9242\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 9243 \ifx #1\relax 9244 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 9245 \else 9246 \expandafter #1% 9247 \fi 9248} 9249 9250\begingroup 9251 \catcode`\~13 9252 \catcode`\"12 9253 9254 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 9255 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 9256 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 9257 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 9258 \advance\countUTFx by 1 9259 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 9260 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 9261 \fi} 9262 9263 \countUTFx = "C2 9264 \countUTFy = "E0 9265 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9266 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 9267 \UTFviiiLoop 9268 9269 \countUTFx = "E0 9270 \countUTFy = "F0 9271 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9272 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 9273 \UTFviiiLoop 9274 9275 \countUTFx = "F0 9276 \countUTFy = "F4 9277 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9278 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 9279 \UTFviiiLoop 9280\endgroup 9281 9282\begingroup 9283 \catcode`\"=12 9284 \catcode`\<=12 9285 \catcode`\.=12 9286 \catcode`\,=12 9287 \catcode`\;=12 9288 \catcode`\!=12 9289 \catcode`\~=13 9290 9291 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 9292 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 9293 %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 9294 \begingroup 9295 \parseXMLCharref 9296 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 9297 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 9298 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 9299 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 9300 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 9301 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 9302 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9303 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9304 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 9305 \endgroup} 9306 9307 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 9308 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 9309 \errhelp = \EMsimple 9310 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 9311 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 9312 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9313 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 9314 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 9315 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9316 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9317 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 9318 \else 9319 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9320 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9321 \parseUTFviiiA!% 9322 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 9323 \fi\fi\fi 9324 } 9325 9326 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 9327 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 9328 \divide\countUTFz by 64 9329 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 9330 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 9331 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 9332 \advance\countUTFx by 128 9333 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 9334 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 9335 9336 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 9337 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 9338 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 9339 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 9340\endgroup 9341 9342\def\utfeightchardefs{% 9343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 9344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 9345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 9346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 9347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 9348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 9349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 9350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 9351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 9352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 9353 9354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 9355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 9356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 9357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 9358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 9359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 9360 9361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 9362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 9363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 9364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 9365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 9366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 9367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 9368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 9369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 9370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 9371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 9372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 9373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 9374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 9375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 9376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 9377 9378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} 9379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 9380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 9381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 9382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 9383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 9384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 9385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 9386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 9387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 9388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 9389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 9390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 9391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} 9392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 9393 9394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 9395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 9396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 9397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 9398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 9399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 9400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 9401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 9402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 9403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 9404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 9405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 9406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 9407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 9410 9411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} 9412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 9413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 9414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 9415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 9416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 9417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 9418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 9419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 9420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 9421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 9422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 9423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 9424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} 9425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 9426 9427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 9428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 9429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 9430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 9431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} 9432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} 9433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 9434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 9435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 9436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 9437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} 9438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} 9439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 9440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 9441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 9442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 9443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 9444 9445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 9446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 9447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 9448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 9449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 9450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 9451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 9452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 9453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 9454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 9455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 9456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 9457 9458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 9459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 9460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 9461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 9462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 9463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 9464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 9465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 9466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 9467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 9468 9469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 9470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 9471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 9472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 9473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 9474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 9475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 9476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 9477 9478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 9479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 9480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 9481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 9482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 9483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 9484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 9485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 9486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 9487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 9488 9489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 9490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 9491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 9492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 9493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 9494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 9495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 9496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 9497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 9498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 9499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 9500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 9501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 9502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 9503 9504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 9505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 9506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 9507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 9508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 9509 9510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 9511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 9512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 9513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 9514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 9515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 9516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 9517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 9518 9519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 9520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 9521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 9522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 9523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 9524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 9525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 9526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 9527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 9528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 9529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 9530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 9531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 9532 9533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 9534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 9535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 9536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 9537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 9538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 9539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 9540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 9541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 9542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 9543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 9544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 9545 9546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 9547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 9548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 9549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 9550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 9551 9552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 9553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 9554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 9555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 9556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 9557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 9558 9559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 9560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 9561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 9562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 9563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 9564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 9565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 9566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 9567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 9568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 9569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 9570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 9571 9572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 9573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 9574 9575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 9576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 9577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 9578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 9579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 9580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 9581 9582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 9583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 9584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 9585 9586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} 9587 9588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 9589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 9590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 9591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 9592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 9593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 9594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 9595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 9596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 9597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 9598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 9599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 9600 9601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 9602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 9603 9604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 9605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 9606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 9607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 9608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 9609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 9610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 9611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 9612 9613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 9614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 9615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 9616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 9617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 9618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 9619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 9620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 9621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 9622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 9623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 9624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 9625 9626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 9627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 9628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 9629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 9630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 9631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 9632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 9633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 9634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 9635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 9636 9637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 9638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 9639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 9640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 9641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 9642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 9643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 9644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 9645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 9646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 9647 9648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 9649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 9650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 9651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 9652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 9653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 9654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 9655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 9656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 9657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 9658 9659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 9660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 9661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 9662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 9663 9664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 9665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 9666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 9667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 9668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 9669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 9670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 9671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 9672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 9673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 9674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 9675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 9676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 9677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 9678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 9679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 9680 9681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 9682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 9683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 9684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 9685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 9686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 9687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 9688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 9689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 9690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 9691 9692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 9693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 9694 9695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 9696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 9697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 9698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 9699 9700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 9701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 9702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 9703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 9704 9705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 9706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 9707 9708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 9709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 9710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 9711 9712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 9713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 9714 9715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 9716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 9717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 9718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 9719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 9720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 9721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 9722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 9723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 9724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 9725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 9726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 9727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 9728 9729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 9730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 9731 9732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 9733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 9734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 9735}% end of \utfeightchardefs 9736 9737 9738% US-ASCII character definitions. 9739\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 9740 \relax 9741} 9742 9743% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 9744% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 9745% document encoding. 9746% 9747\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 9748 9749 9750\message{formatting,} 9751 9752\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 9753 9754\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 9755\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 9756\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 9757 9758% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 9759\vbadness = 10000 9760 9761% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 9762\hbadness = 6666 9763 9764% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 9765\widowpenalty=10000 9766\clubpenalty=10000 9767 9768% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 9769% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 9770% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 9771% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 9772% 9773\def\setemergencystretch{% 9774 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 9775 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 9776 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 9777 \else 9778 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 9779 \fi 9780} 9781 9782% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 9783% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 9784% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 9785% 9786% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 9787% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 9788% 9789\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 9790 \voffset = #3\relax 9791 \topskip = #6\relax 9792 \splittopskip = \topskip 9793 % 9794 \vsize = #1\relax 9795 \advance\vsize by \topskip 9796 \outervsize = \vsize 9797 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 9798 \pageheight = \vsize 9799 % 9800 \hsize = #2\relax 9801 \outerhsize = \hsize 9802 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 9803 \pagewidth = \hsize 9804 % 9805 \normaloffset = #4\relax 9806 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 9807 % 9808 \ifpdf 9809 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 9810 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 9811 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 9812 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 9813 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 9814 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 9815 \fi 9816 % 9817 \setleading{\textleading} 9818 % 9819 \parindent = \defaultparindent 9820 \setemergencystretch 9821} 9822 9823% @letterpaper (the default). 9824\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9825 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9826 \textleading = 13.2pt 9827 % 9828 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 9829 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 9830 {\voffset}{.25in}% 9831 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 9832 {11in}{8.5in}% 9833}} 9834 9835% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 9836\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9837 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 9838 \textleading = 12pt 9839 % 9840 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 9841 {-.2in}{0in}% 9842 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 9843 {9.25in}{7in}% 9844 % 9845 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 9846 \tolerance = 700 9847 \hfuzz = 1pt 9848 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9849 \defbodyindent = .5cm 9850}} 9851 9852% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 9853% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 9854\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9855 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 9856 \textleading = 12pt 9857 % 9858 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 9859 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 9860 {0pt}{14pt}% 9861 {9in}{6in}% 9862 % 9863 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 9864 \tolerance = 700 9865 \hfuzz = 1pt 9866 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9867 \defbodyindent = .4cm 9868}} 9869 9870% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 9871\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9872 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9873 \textleading = 13.2pt 9874 % 9875 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 9876 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 9877 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 9878 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 9879 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 9880 % your texinfo source file like this: 9881 % @tex 9882 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 9883 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 9884 % @end tex 9885 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 9886 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9887 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9888 {297mm}{210mm}% 9889 % 9890 \tolerance = 700 9891 \hfuzz = 1pt 9892 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9893 \defbodyindent = 5mm 9894}} 9895 9896% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 9897% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 9898% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 9899\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9900 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 9901 \textleading = 12.5pt 9902 % 9903 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 9904 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9905 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 9906 {210mm}{148mm}% 9907 % 9908 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 9909 \tolerance = 800 9910 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 9911 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9912 \defbodyindent = 2mm 9913 \tableindent = 12mm 9914}} 9915 9916% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 9917\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 9918 \afourpaper 9919 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 9920 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 9921 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9922 {297mm}{210mm}% 9923 % 9924 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 9925 \globaldefs = 0 9926}} 9927 9928% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 9929\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 9930 \afourpaper 9931 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 9932 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 9933 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9934 {297mm}{210mm}% 9935 \globaldefs = 0 9936}} 9937 9938% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 9939% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 9940% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 9941% 9942\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 9943\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 9944 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 9945 \globaldefs = 1 9946 % 9947 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9948 \setleading{\textleading}% 9949 % 9950 \dimen0 = #1\relax 9951 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 9952 % 9953 \dimen2 = \hsize 9954 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 9955 % 9956 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 9957 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 9958 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9959 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 9960}} 9961 9962% Set default to letter. 9963% 9964\letterpaper 9965 9966 9967\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 9968 9969\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 9970 9971% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 9972\catcode`\^^? = 14 9973 9974% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 9975\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 9976\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 9977\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 9978\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 9979\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 9980\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 9981\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 9982\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 9983\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 9984 9985% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 9986% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 9987% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 9988% 9989% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 9990% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 9991% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 9992% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 9993% 9994\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9995 9996% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 9997% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 9998% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 9999% this is not a problem. 10000\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 10001 10002% Turn off all special characters except @ 10003% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 10004% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 10005% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 10006 10007\catcode`\"=\active 10008\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 10009\let"=\activedoublequote 10010\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 10011\chardef\hat=`\^ 10012\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hat}} \let^ = \activehat 10013 10014\catcode`\_=\active 10015\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 10016\let\realunder=_ 10017% Subroutine for the previous macro. 10018\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 10019 10020\catcode`\|=\active 10021\def|{{\tt\char124}} 10022 10023\chardef \less=`\< 10024\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 10025\chardef \gtr=`\> 10026\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 10027\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 10028\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 10029 10030% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 10031% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 10032\def\texinfochars{% 10033 \let< = \activeless 10034 \let> = \activegtr 10035 \let~ = \activetilde 10036 \let^ = \activehat 10037 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 10038 \let\b = \strong 10039 \let\i = \smartitalic 10040 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 10041} 10042 10043% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 10044% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 10045% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 10046% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 10047\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 10048 10049% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 10050% parsing them. 10051\def\turnoffactive{% 10052 \normalturnoffactive 10053 \otherbackslash 10054} 10055 10056\catcode`\@=0 10057 10058% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 10059% as in \char`\\. 10060\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 10061\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 10062 10063% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 10064% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 10065{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 10066 10067% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 10068% in fixed width font. 10069\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 10070 10071% The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont 10072% ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char 10073% in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets 10074% \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always 10075% print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 10076% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 10077% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 10078% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 10079@def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 10080@let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 10081 10082% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 10083% @let \ = @normalbackslash 10084% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 10085% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 10086% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 10087@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 10088@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 10089 10090% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 10091% the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in 10092% case the active - from code has slipped in. 10093% 10094{@catcode`- = @active 10095 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 10096 @let-=@normaldash 10097 @let"=@normaldoublequote 10098 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 10099 @let+=@normalplus 10100 @let<=@normalless 10101 @let>=@normalgreater 10102 @let\=@normalbackslash 10103 @let^=@normalcaret 10104 @let_=@normalunderscore 10105 @let|=@normalverticalbar 10106 @let~=@normaltilde 10107 @markupsetuplqdefault 10108 @markupsetuprqdefault 10109 @unsepspaces 10110 } 10111} 10112 10113% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 10114% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 10115@otherifyactive 10116 10117% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 10118% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 10119% a backslash. 10120% 10121@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 10122@global@let\ = @eatinput 10123 10124% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 10125% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 10126% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 10127% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 10128% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 10129% 10130@gdef@fixbackslash{% 10131 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 10132 @catcode`+=@active 10133 @catcode`@_=@active 10134} 10135 10136% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 10137@escapechar = `@@ 10138 10139% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 10140% active definitions as the normal characters. 10141@def@normaldot{.} 10142@def@normalquest{?} 10143@def@normalslash{/} 10144 10145% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 10146% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 10147@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 10148@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 10149@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 10150 10151@let @hashchar = @normalhash 10152 10153@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 10154@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 10155@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 10156@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 10157@catcode`@'=@active 10158@catcode`@`=@active 10159@markupsetuplqdefault 10160@markupsetuprqdefault 10161 10162@c Local variables: 10163@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 10164@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 10165@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 10166@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 10167@c time-stamp-end: "}" 10168@c End: 10169 10170@c vim:sw=2: 10171 10172@ignore 10173 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 10174@end ignore 10175